JP2021118980A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of indicating an expectation degree to a player in an easy-to-understand manner.SOLUTION: A game machine includes detection means that can detect an action of a player, prompting notification means that can execute prompting notification to prompt an action of the player, and performance execution means that can execute a predetermined performance based on the detection of the action of the player by the detection means. The prompting notification means can execute the prompting notification for prompting an action by a first pattern displaying at least a first prompting image and a second pattern displaying a second prompting image in addition to the first prompting image. An expectation degree differs depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern is used for executing the promoting notification. Information display means is provided on a main board that can display predetermined prize ball information on a prize ball.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 32

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value is the right to be in an advantageous state for a player who is likely to win a prize, or to be in an advantageous state for a player, regarding the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine. And the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be met.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a "round". In addition, the game in the round is sometimes called "round game".

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as "reach state") is referred to as "reach effect". In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as "reach mode". Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called "reach variable display". Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, Cited Document 1 describes that during the variable display, an effect for urging the operation of the effect button and an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button are performed. In addition, the effect for encouraging the operation of the effect button is performed by displaying an image that imitates the appearance of the effect button, and the degree of expectation differs depending on the difference in the display mode of the image (for example, the difference in size and color). It is stated that.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-188306

However, the gaming machines described in Patent Document 1 have a problem that it is difficult to understand that the degree of expectation is different.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of showing a player an easy-to-understand degree of expectation.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a main board (for example, main board 11, main board 9011, etc.) that controls a game, and a predetermined area (for example, a second start winning prize) in which a prize ball is paid out when the game medium passes through. Ordinary variable winning ball device 906B as a mouth, special variable winning ball device 907 as a large winning opening, ordinary winning ball device 906A as the first starting winning opening, general winning opening 9050A to 9050D as a general winning area), and the above. Information display means (for example, display monitor 9029) capable of displaying predetermined prize ball information (for example, winning combination, winning ratio) regarding the winning ball paid out by passing the game medium through the predetermined area, and detecting the movement of the player. Possible detection means (for example, push button 120, stick controller 122, infrared sensor, etc.) and promotion notification for promoting the movement of the player (for example, operation promotion for displaying a first operation promotion image or a second operation promotion image). The movement of the player is detected by the promotion notification means (for example, the portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S811, S8125, S8139, S8153, S8167) and the detection means. Based on the above, the effect executing means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8114, S8128, S8142, S8156, S8170) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, each button effect) is provided. The promotion notification means provides a first promotion image (for example, a push button 120) for prompting one operation (for example, an operation of pressing the push button 120 once, an operation of repeatedly hitting, an operation of long pressing, etc.). A first pattern that displays at least a first operation-promoting image that imitates the appearance of It is feasible by the second pattern that displays the operation promotion image) (see FIGS. 32 to 34), and is expected depending on whether the promotion notification is executed by the first pattern or the second pattern. The degree is different (for example, the first effect mode of the hit / miss button effect in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern, and the second effect mode and the second effect mode of the hit / fail button effect in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. The degree of expectation is different from that of the three production modes (see FIG. 32 (c)), and the information display means is provided on the main substrate so as not to interfere with the visibility of the predetermined prize ball information. It is characterized by.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to show the degree of expectation to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the promotion notification means displays the first promotion image in a plurality of modes (for example, the first operation promotion image (small), the first operation promotion image (medium), and the first operation promotion image (large)). It can be displayed by any of (such as), and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first promotion image is displayed (for example, the operation promotion for displaying the first operation promotion image (middle)). What are the first effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / miss when the notification is performed, and the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of the hit / miss when the operation promotion notification is performed to display the first operation promotion image (large)? , Expectations are different. See FIG. 32 (c)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be improved.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the promotion notification means displays the second promotion image in any one of a plurality of modes (for example, a second operation promotion image (press) or a second operation promotion image (blow)). It is possible to display, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the second promotion images in the plurality of modes is displayed (for example, whether or not the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (press) is performed). The degree of expectation is different between the second effect mode of the hour button effect and the third effect mode of the time button effect when the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (blow) is performed. FIG. 32 (c). See).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be improved.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to the means 3, the effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect at a plurality of timings (for example, when the effect symbol fluctuates at high speed, when the reach is established, when the result is aggravated, etc.). (See FIG. 31), the promotion notification means executes promotion notification at a different ratio depending on the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed (for example, at the time of high-speed fluctuation). At the timing when the button effect is executed and the timing when the button effect when the reach is established, the operation promotion notification is executed according to the first pattern at a rate of 100%, and at the timing when the button effect at the time of hit / miss is executed, If the display result is out of order, the operation promotion notification is executed by the first pattern (the second pattern at the rate of 30%) at a rate of 70%, and if the display result is a big hit, the operation promotion notification is executed at a rate of 35%. The operation promotion notification may be executed according to one pattern (second pattern at a rate of 65%). See FIG. 32).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to the means 4, the detecting means includes an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, a push button 120, a stick controller 122, etc.), and the effect executing means is an operating means. A predetermined effect (for example, each button effect) can be executed according to the operation for, and the validity period notification means (for example, effect control) for notifying the valid period during which the operation is valid (for example, displaying the remaining valid period image). When the valid period ends, the end notification means (for example, displaying the valid period end image) that indicates the end of the valid period (for example, the part where the microcomputer 100 executes steps S8112 and S8119) For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a portion for executing step S8116, and the end notification means performs end notification when the operation is performed before the end of the valid period (for example, for effect control). The microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step S8116 when it is determined to be Y in step S8113).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the validity period has expired based on the operation.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to the means 5, the detecting means includes an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, a push button 120, a stick controller 122, etc.), and the effect executing means is an operating means. Includes an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect (for example, an operation unit effect) using the The operation effect executing means includes the display control means to be displayed on the display means, and the operation effect executing means has a plurality of modes (for example, "white", "red", "white / vibration", "white / vibration" shown in FIG. 45) depending on the degree of expectation. Change to any of (red / vibration)), and the display control means displays the accelerated image in a plurality of modes (for example, “white / small”, “red / small”, “white / small” shown in FIG. 45) according to the degree of expectation. Displayed by either "Large" or "Red / Large") and common to a plurality of modes of the operating means (for example, "white"("white / small" and "white / large") shown in FIG. 45). It may be configured to have a common image display control means for displaying the promotion image of the above.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be improved.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following means A1 to A10 and means B1 to B9. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a windmill or a large number of gaming nails for changing the flow direction and speed of a gaming ball are provided on the surface of the gaming board as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576. be. In this type of gaming machine, the passing ratio of the winning opening and the passing gate varies depending on the adjustment of the gaming nails provided on the gaming board. In such a gaming machine, the payout rate of the gaming ball may be designed by adjusting the gaming nails and the like. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what kind of adjustment was made to the gaming nails and the like, there is a problem that it is difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate is as designed. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine that can recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901) is a normal variable winning ball device serving as a second starting winning opening in a predetermined area (for example, a second starting winning opening) in which a prize ball is paid out when a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through. 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907 that serves as a large winning opening, a normal winning ball device 906A that serves as the first starting winning opening, general winning openings 9050A to 9050D that serve as a general winning area, and a main board that controls the game (for example, An information display means (for example, display monitor 9029) provided on the main board 9011) and capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, winning combination, winning ratio) regarding a prize ball paid out by passing the game medium through a predetermined area, and The information display means is provided on a main board that controls a game so as not to interfere with visibility.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
The information display means is arranged on the front surface when the main board is visually recognized (for example, the front surface when the main board 9011 is visually recognized).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the information display means from being hindered.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
Means A1 or A2 gaming machine
The information display means is arranged at a position not hidden by a sealing sticker (for example, sealing sticker 9011S) that seals the main substrate.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the information display means from being hindered.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A3.
The information display means is located at a position where a heat radiating hole (for example, a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board) provided in a board case (for example, a board case 90201) on the main board is not directly in front of the board. Have been placed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the information display means from being hindered.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A4.
The information display means is arranged at a position that does not overlap with peripheral boards other than the main board (for example, effect control board 9012, voice control board 9013, voice lamp control board 9014, power supply board, payout control board, emission control board). ing.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the information display means from being hindered.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A5.
The predetermined information includes a prize ball paid out by passing through a movable area (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907) and a fixed area (ordinary winning ball device 906A, a general winning opening 9050A to 9050D). ) Is the information about the relationship with the prize ball paid out by passing.
According to the above configuration, the winning combination and the winning combination can be displayed.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A6.
The information display means can switch and display a plurality of the predetermined information at predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
According to the above configuration, the increase of members can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A7.
The information display means displays information for each predetermined unit (for example, the number of prize balls is 60,000) as the predetermined information.
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A8.
The information display means switches and displays information for each predetermined unit (for example, short-term combination, short-term combination ratio) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative combination, cumulative combination ratio) as the predetermined information.
According to the above configuration, the information for each predetermined unit and the cumulative information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A9.
The information display means is provided in the main substrate and is housed in a crimped substrate case (for example, substrate case 90201).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means B1
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
During a specific period (1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning) after the gaming medium enters the general winning area, a predetermined condition (effective starting winning, reach to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). It is provided with an effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (pre-reading notice effect), specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect)) when the state is established. It is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 47th production form to the 49th production form).
According to this, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general prize area, and the specific effect is performed after the game medium enters the general prize area. It is possible to enhance the interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
Execution of notification effect for executing notification effect (any of characters A to C appears immediately after winning a prize in the general winning opening) so as to be able to identify the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area. It is a gaming machine characterized by further providing means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as a notification effect for notifying that the state after the game medium has entered, the player determines whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. It includes both an effect that is difficult to grasp and an effect that the player can easily grasp whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect of outputting a sound effect for a relatively short period (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general prize area, and as the latter effect, there is a general prize area. There is an effect that the character is continuously displayed on the image display device from immediately after the game medium enters until a predetermined specific period (for example, 1 minute) elapses.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
It is a gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the specific period is specified (the specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game until the specific production is executed.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period differs depending on the mode of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears. The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be as follows, for example.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) has a plurality of predetermined specific periods (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). One of the specific periods is selected, an effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 905) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is displayed for a specific period) is determined according to the determined effect mode. Execute the effect to be displayed).
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, display of character A) is set as compared with the case where the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is advisable to increase the determined rate. Further, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, the display of character B) is set as compared with the case where the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is advisable to increase the determined rate.
When the specific period and the production mode of the notification effect correspond to one-to-one (1 minute for character A, 2 minutes for character B, and 3 minutes for character C). ), The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) determines one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes based on the game medium entering the general winning area. , It is preferable to execute the notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
The variable display means has a starting condition based on the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area (a game ball wins a prize in the first starting winning opening when the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (effective starting winning). ), And the game ball won the second start winning opening (valid start winning) when the second reserved memory number did not reach the upper limit), and then the start condition (controlled to the jackpot game state) The variable display is executed based on the fact that the variable display of the special figure game is not executed).
The effect executing means corresponds to a notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (in the start prize memory display area 905H, the variable display game to be notified is supported. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form) characterized in that the holding change effect of changing the display portion from the normal mode to the special mode is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general prize area by creating a hobby of notifying the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied, triggered by the entry of the game medium into the general prize area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the beginning to the execution of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Means B5 gaming machine
Hold information corresponding to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. It is further provided with a hold information display control means (CPU 90120 for effect control) for displaying the display portion) on the display device (image display device 905).
The advance notice effect is to announce the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the mode of the hold information (if the start winning determination result designation command is a command to specify "big hit", the notice effect is applicable. It is a pending change effect that changes the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode (for example, blue or red) to the special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for specifying "off"). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
It is a gaming machine of means B6,
By displaying the objects (characters A to C) on the display device, the effect executing means identifiablely notifies the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (to the general winning opening). (Any of the characters A to C will appear immediately after winning the prize)
The advance notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information (the mode of the display portion corresponding to the special figure game in which the displayed character performs some action and is held. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an effect of changing from a normal mode to a special mode).
According to this, it is possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied by a common object, and the game to the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific production.
Specifically, the player can recognize that the object changes the mode of the hold information by making the effect that the mode of the hold information changes according to the change of the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed if the predetermined condition is not satisfied within the character display period). be.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 50D).
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning is specified. It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but if you win the 3rd general winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D, only 5 minutes from the general winning can be a specific period (character C only). Is possible to appear))).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B10 to means B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
Motion detection means (operation button 9030 and effect control CPU 90120) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
When the player's motion (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) is detected by the motion detecting means after the gaming medium has entered the general winning area, a specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-ream) is detected. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 50th production form to the 53rd production form), which is provided with an effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye advance notice effect. ..
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific effect is executed triggered by the action of the player, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B11
It is a gaming machine of means B10,
The state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is identifiablely notified (in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode, the button icon 904000 is increased for each prize in the general winning opening, 52nd In the production form and the 53rd production form, the advance notice production (“cut-in”, “pseudo-ream”, “chance eye”) that can be executed for each prize in the general winning opening is determined, and the characters 904000a according to the determination result. The gaming machine is further provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a notification effect (displaying up to 904000c).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12
It is a gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of operation (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling the specific effect, the mode of the notification effect (character 904000a of "cut-in", "pseudo-ream") It is a gaming machine characterized in that the characters 904000b and the characters 904000c of "chance eyes" are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation enables the specific effect to be executed.

The gaming machine of means B13
A gaming machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general winning area the gaming medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning opening 9050A of the left game area 9010A or When the second general winning opening 9050B is won, the notification is given at a higher rate than when the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the right gaming area 9010B is won). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B13.
There are a plurality of general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won. In this case, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" can be displayed, and when the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won, " It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can display either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000c of "chance eye").
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B14.
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the general winning opening is won in the normal state. In the case (when the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left game area 9010A is won), when the general winning opening is won in the probabilistic state or the time saving state (the first of the right game area 9010B). 3) If you win the general winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D), you will be notified at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B15.
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, in the normal state, the characters 904000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo". The character 904000b of "ream" can be displayed, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" and the character 904000c of "chance eye" can be displayed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B16.
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined operation is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (generally in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode). Pseudo-continuous notice production can be executed when the winning opening is won twice or more, and chance eye notice production can be executed when the general winning opening is won three times or more)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B17.
There are a plurality of general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The execution ratio of the specific effect differs depending on which general prize area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening 9050B is used. If a prize is won, the advance notice will be performed at a higher rate than if the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B18.
There are a plurality of general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd and 53rd production forms, the 1st general winning opening 9050A or the 2nd general winning opening). If the 9050B is won, either the cut-in notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed, and if the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won, the cut-in notice effect is produced. And any of the chance eye notice effects can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B19.
The execution rate of the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, when the general winning opening is won in the normal state ( In the case of winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B in the left game area 9010A), if the general winning opening is won in the probabilistic state or the time saving state (the third general in the right game area 9010B). (When a prize is won in the winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D), a notification is given to enable the specific effect to be executed at a higher rate than the winning opening 9050C).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B20.
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-ream in the normal state. Either of the advance notice effects can be executed, and either the cut-in advance notice effect or the chance eye advance notice effect can be executed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B22 to B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point-giving effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result advance notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect).
When the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or is determined to be executed), the general winning area When the game medium enters the machine and when the variable display is not executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, it is also decided that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is executed. Pachinko machines (27th to 30th production forms) characterized in that the ratio at which the specific effect is executed differs between when the game medium enters the general winning area (within the period during which the game is not played). It is a game machine 901).
According to this, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs between the case where the variable display is executed and the case where the variable display is not executed, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area is enhanced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B23
It is a gaming machine of means B22,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point-giving effect) in a gaming machine (27th effect form, 29th effect form pachinko gaming machine 901). be.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24
It is a gaming machine of means B22,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed. This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 28th effect mode and the 30th effect form), which is characterized in that it is not executed when the game medium enters the machine.
According to this, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point-giving effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result advance notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect).
When the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or is determined to be executed), the general winning area When the game medium enters the machine and when the variable display is not executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, it is also decided that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is executed. A gaming machine (31st effect form and 32nd effect form pachinko game machine 901) characterized in that a different specific effect is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (within a period not specified). ).
According to this, different specific effects differ depending on whether the variable display is executed and the variable display is not executed, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be enhanced. ..

The gaming machine of means B26 is
It is a gaming machine of means B25,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect). Is executed as the specific effect,
When the gaming medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point-giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. It is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be further enhanced, and even when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area can be further enhanced. It is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B26 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form).
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed (for example, a special figure game when winning a prize in the general winning opening). Is executed or not, the number of stored memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is the normal state, or the probabilistic state or the time saving state. Perform specific effects at different rates depending on the classification, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to be interested in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B27 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form).
When the variable display is being executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, the special figure game is executed when the general winning opening is won. Whether or not the game is in the normal state, the number of stored memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and whether the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is in the normal state, or in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. Execute different types of specific effects according to the classification, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to be interested in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B29 to means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (Fig. 33), a winning rate for a starting winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing different color clothes is used according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display the information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more visible. The invention according to the means B29 to the means B39 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is to make it easy to visually recognize information on the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B29
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Equipped with a display means (image display device 905)
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, etc.) different from the approach information in an area where the visibility of the approach information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 87, each winning opening). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in a second area β), which is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B30
It is a gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the approach information regardless of the mode of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 87, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed, and the fourth symbol. Regardless of whether or not is variablely displayed, the number of prizes to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. The displayed number of prizes can be updated according to the prizes in each prize opening.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized regardless of the mode of the effect information.

The invention according to means B31
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Error detecting means (abnormality detecting sensor group 9026) for detecting an error (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.) and
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) A display means (image display device 905) is provided.
The information display means sends error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error to each winning opening as illustrated in FIGS. 87 and 88 in an area where the visibility of the entry information is not hindered. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in a second area β), which is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B32
It is a gaming machine of means B31.
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 88, regardless of whether or not the error message is displayed, the general winning opening. The number of winnings, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings in each winning opening. The number of winning prizes can be updated)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Equipped with a display means (image display device 905)
The information display means displays the display result of the variable display (for example, the display result of the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) or the fourth symbol) executed based on the entry of the gaming medium into the start region, and the entry information. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is displayed in an area (as illustrated in FIG. 87, a second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings to each winning opening is displayed). Is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B34
It is a gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the approach information even when the variable display is being executed (as illustrated in FIG. 87, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and also. Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of prizes to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the 2nd starting winning opening, etc. are set to the 1st area α. It is possible to display and update the displayed number of prizes according to the prizes in each prize opening.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means B35
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B34.
Operable operation means (operation button 9030) and
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the approach information on the information display means according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 50, to each winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 9030. The gaming machine is further provided with an effect control CPU 90120) for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the approach information.

The invention according to means B36
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B35.
Operation means (operation button 9030) that can be operated by the player,
The aggregation period setting means (as illustrated in FIG. 91, the effect control CPU 90120 that sets the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 9030) that sets the aggregation period of the entry information according to the operation of the operation means. It is a gaming machine characterized by further providing.
According to this, the aggregation period can be set according to the judgment of the player.

The invention according to means B37
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B36.
Further equipped with a game state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling a game state (big hit game state, probability change state, time saving state, low base state, high base state, etc.).
The information display means can display the approach information according to the game state (as illustrated in FIG. 90, the number of prizes in the low base state and the number of prizes in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the game state.

The invention according to means B38
It is a gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for executing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the game medium entering the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B) is further provided.
The game state control means has a low frequency state (a low base state in which the high opening control for the second start winning opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (the first) in which the frequency at which the game medium enters the start region is different. 2 It is possible to control to the high base state where the high opening control for the starting winning opening is executed).
The information display means includes the entry information (such as the number of general prizes in the low base state exemplified in FIG. 90) regarding the period controlled in the low frequency state and the entry regarding the period controlled in the high frequency state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can display information (general winning numbers in a high base state illustrated in FIG. 90, etc.).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the low frequency state and the approach information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B38.
Notification is performed when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as illustrated in FIG. 91, when the number of winnings per set aggregation period does not reach a predetermined reference value, a notification to that effect is given. The gaming machine is further provided with a notification means (image display device 905) (which displays a message).
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the approach information satisfies the predetermined condition.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B40 and the means B41 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 32 and 33), when a player accepts a game start by inputting a password, the winning rate to the starting winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. , A gaming machine that executes an effect display that displays characters dressed in different colors according to the calculated winning rate has been proposed. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) to be able to confirm the information regarding the fact that the game medium has entered the entry area such as the start winning opening. The invention according to the means B40 and the means B41 is made in view of the above circumstances, and is intended to allow only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk of the game hall) to confirm the information.

The invention according to means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A-9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. It is a gaming machine 901)
An imparting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100) for imparting a game value (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the approach area.
Specific operating means (for example, mode changeover switch 9031, reset button) that cannot be operated by the player,
A notification means for notifying cumulative value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening, the number of payouts of each starting winning opening, and the total number of payouts) regarding the cumulative value of the game value given by the granting means (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening, and the total number of payouts). For example, an image display device 905) is provided.
The notification means notifies the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, when the mode changeover switch 9031 is operated to enter the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed as an image display device. Display on 905)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) can confirm the information.

The "specific operating means that cannot be operated by the player" may be, for example, any means that can be operated by a clerk at the game hall or an inspector / inspector of the gaming machine.

The invention according to means B41
Means B40 gaming machine
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 90120) for executing a production related to a game is provided.
The notification means notifies the cumulative value information according to the mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means (for example, a character appearing during the advance notice effect or the reach effect provides information on the winning number management table. (Displays aloud and outputs voice)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of gaming machine information is from the mode of notification.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B42 to means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters the normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. , A gaming machine has been proposed in which when the count-up count reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memorable consecutive villa will occur. In the gaming machine shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, when a gaming ball enters a normal winning opening, the number of balls entered is uniformly counted up and displayed one by one. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions according to the means B42 to the means B51 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect (specific effect D that gradually increases the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) that changes the effect mode stepwise according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. A specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The specific according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, etc.). The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 by one step is executed is different).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 33rd production form to the 37th production form).
According to this, the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
It is a gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to a variable pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To do
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). , A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 34th production form), characterized in that the rate of change of the production mode is different in the specific production.
According to this, the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced by changing the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general prize area.

In the gaming machine of means B43
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). ) And the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs. You may. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is displayed. Depending on the specific effect, the rate of change in the effect mode may be different (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol, it changes at a high rate, and in the case of an out-of-order symbol, it changes at a lower rate). ..

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A gaming machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 905) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start prize) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit game state. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect). It is further equipped with a notice effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) to be executed before).
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). A game machine characterized in that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed (the pachinko game machine of the 35th effect form). 901).
According to this, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the period from the entry of the game medium into the general prize area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B44
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). According to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the effect is produced in the specific effect. The rate at which the mode changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general winning area, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that is the target of the notice effect is executed is within a predetermined range. In the case of within (for example, 2 times or less), the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol). It may change at a rate, and if it becomes an outlier, it may change at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B44.
A reach effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is further provided.
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), and after the execution of the reach effect. The rate at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general prize area (when the game ball wins the general prize opening after the reach state is established due to the reach fluctuation). This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 36th production form).
According to this, the production mode changes in the specific production depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect or the game medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect. By having different ratios, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B45.
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D), and has a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
Depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, or when the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D are entered. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 37th production form) characterized in that the rate of change in the production mode is different in the specific production (depending on the case where the game ball wins a prize in any of the above).
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production by changing the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific production according to the general winning area in which the game medium has entered.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect (specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is gradually increased from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) is provided, in which the effect mode is gradually changed according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. A specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The specific according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, etc.). The stages in which the production mode changes in the production are different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is different).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 38th production form to the 42nd production form).
According to this, the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
Means B47 gaming machine
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to a variable pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To do
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). , A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 39th production form), characterized in that the stages in which the production mode changes in the specific production are different.
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). ) And the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. You may. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is displayed. Correspondingly, even if the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol, the number of stages changes, and in the case of an out-of-order symbol, the number of stages changes less than that). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A gaming machine of means B47 or means B48.
The variable display means (image display device 905) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start prize) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit game state. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect). It is further equipped with a notice effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) to be executed before).
The period from when the gaming medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). A gaming machine characterized in that the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed (the pachinko gaming machine of the 40th effect form). 901).
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice production. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B49
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). According to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the effect is produced in the specific effect. The stage at which the aspect changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general winning area, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that is the target of the notice effect is executed is within a predetermined range. In the case of within (for example, twice or less), the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol). The number of steps may change, and if the symbol is out of order, the number of steps may change less than that.)

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B49.
A reach effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is further provided.
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), and after the execution of the reach effect. The stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general prize area (when the game ball wins the general prize opening after the reach state is established due to the reach fluctuation). It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 41st production form).
According to this, the production mode changes in a specific effect depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the reach effect is executed or the game medium enters the general winning area after the reach effect is executed. By different stages, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B51
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B50.
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D), and has a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
Depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, or when the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D are entered. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 42nd production form) characterized in that the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production is different depending on whether the game ball wins a prize in any of the above.
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B52 to B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters the normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. , A gaming machine has been proposed in which when the count-up count reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memorable consecutive villa will occur. In the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, the effect (count-up display) is executed every time the gaming ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, if the game medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The inventions according to the means B52 to the means B56 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to make it possible to grasp that the game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
When the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes when it is detected that the game is being played is 0, or when the game is played. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than 3 in 30 minutes when it is detected to be inside, a specific effect (an image imitating the form of the general winning opening and "There is no general winning" is said. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a notification image 902200 or the like including characters on an image display device 905.
According to this, the player and the game hall can grasp that the number of the game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53
It is a gaming machine of means B52,
A setting means for setting whether or not to allow the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means (an effect in which whether or not to execute the specific effect E is determined based on the game hall setting and the player setting in the display setting table. Control CPU 90120) and
It is further equipped with a clerk operation reception means (display changeover switch 9032) that accepts setting operations by the clerk.
When the setting operation is received by the clerk operation receiving means, the setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect (specific effect E (notifies that there is no general prize) based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032. ， Notify that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the amusement park regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53.
A storage means (a winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122) for storing the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings for 30 minutes) is further provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of entries stored in the storage means is not retained at the time of power failure (the value in the winning number counter area is erased by power failure).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control load for holding the memory of the number of intrusions at the time of power failure.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B54.
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate depending on the case of the normal state and the case of the probability variation state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B55.
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effects E are executed in different modes depending on the normal state and the probabilistic state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B57 to B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), the number of prize balls (added value) obtained by the game medium entering the big winning opening during the execution of the big hit game, There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (added value) obtained by entering the game medium into the ordinary winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intentions of the game hall and the player are not reflected with respect to whether or not to execute the effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions relating to means B57 to means B64 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
When the game medium enters the general winning area, the information of the winning number management table is displayed in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, by the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030. Based on the settings, the object is increased each time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead Notification means (image display device 905) capable of executing a notice effect) and
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising setting means (mode changeover switch 9031, display changeover switch 9032, and operation button 9030) for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means. ..
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
It is a gaming machine of means B57,
Further equipped with a clerk operation receiving means (mode changeover switch 9031, display changeover switch 9032) for accepting setting operations by the clerk.
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the clerk operation receiving means (based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, the winning number management table in the maintenance mode). Based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, the object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed, and the specific effect A : Makes it possible to execute the fluctuation result advance notice effect, Specific effect B: Makes it possible to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the amusement park regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58.
Further equipped with a player operation receiving means for accepting setting operations by the player,
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the player operation receiving means (general winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 9030 displayed on the demo screen). Increases the number of objects each time the game ball enters the game, displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state based on the setting by the operation button 9030 while the demo screen is displayed, Specific effect A: Fluctuation result notice effect Specific effect B: Pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B59.
The specific effect identifiablely notifies the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area during a predetermined period (the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state) (the number of winning balls to the winning opening and the number of winning balls). The number of prize balls according to the above, the number of prize balls to the general winning opening, and the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls are displayed separately).
According to this, the playability in a predetermined period can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B61
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B60.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a featured gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B61.
The specific effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area (the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form are executed). Is.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B62.
The specific effect is an effect that identifiablely notifies the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the object is increased each time the game ball enters the general winning opening).
When the game is not performed on the gaming machine (the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received for a predetermined period. The effect control CPU 90120 that determines the end of the game based on the fact that the game has not been completed), and notifies that the number of the game media entering the general winning area is 0 in the specific effect (the end of the game is determined). In that case, all the objects corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 are deleted.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B63.
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information (an object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening) corresponding to the number of entries of the gaming medium into the general winning area is displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to means B65 to means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes and the start memory is displayed. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is "hit" or "missing". In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning opening. The invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect) is provided.
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state). , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher ratio than in the probability variation or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the first production form to the fourth production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect).
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state). , Execute different specific effects (execute specific effects A in the normal state, and execute specific effects B in the probabilistic or time-saving state)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the fifth production form to the twelfth production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
A gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
In the first gaming state (normal state), when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area becomes the first number of entries, the specific effect is executed.
In the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state), the specific effect is executed when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect) is provided.
The above when the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established) and during the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established). The ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (after the reach fluctuation state is established, it is specified at a higher ratio than before the reach state of the reach fluctuation or the period other than the reach fluctuation is established. The production is executed)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the thirteenth production form to the sixteenth production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect).
The above when the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established) and during the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established). A different specific effect is executed depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (the specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and the specific effect B is executed before the reach state is established. Execute specific effect A, and execute specific effect B during a period other than reach fluctuation or before the reach state of reach fluctuation is established)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 17th production form to the 24th production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70
A gaming machine of means B68 or means B69 (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 14th effect form to the 16th effect form, the 22nd effect form to the 24th effect form).
During the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area becomes the first number of entries, the specific effect is executed.
During the second period (a period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), the number of entries of the gaming medium into the general winning area is the number of second entries different from the number of first entries. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed in some cases.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B70 (second effect form, sixth effect form, tenth effect form to twelfth effect form, 14th effect form, 18th effect form, 22nd effect form). Pachinko game machine 901)
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D), and has a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a gaming medium enters each of a plurality of the general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B65 to means B71 (pachinko gaming machines 901 in the 5th to 12th effects and the 17th to 24th effects).
The variable display means has started conditions (variable display based on the previous start winning prize has been completed and a jackpot game state) after the game medium has entered the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that it is not controlled.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can control the advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. )When,
Pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the start condition is satisfied (control to the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning). A game control microcomputer 90100) that determines whether or not to play is further provided.
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, the effect of notifying that the advantageous state is controlled (pre-reading advance notice effect) is performed by the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition of the variable display to be targeted is satisfied. It is a gaming machine characterized by executing as.
According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect more interesting by notifying that the variable display start condition is controlled in an advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the first production form to the 24th production form).
The variable display means has started conditions (variable display based on the previous start winning prize has been completed and a jackpot game state) after the game medium has entered the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that it is not controlled.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can control the advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. )When,
When the start condition is satisfied, the start time determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for jackpot determination stored when the variable display of the special symbol is started). A game control microcomputer 90100) that determines whether or not to control the jackpot game state based on a random number is further provided.
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that an effect (variation result advance notice effect) for notifying control of the advantageous state is executed as the specific effect based on the start time determination.
According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect more interesting by foretelling that the control is performed in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B73 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution rate of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning in the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 11th effect form and the 23rd effect form).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning in the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B75 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form). And
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D), and has a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order in which the gaming media enter the plurality of general winning areas in a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the order of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any game machine selected from means B65 to means B76 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form). And
It has other winning areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning area.
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order in which the game medium enters the general winning area and the game medium enters the other winning area in a specific order. ..
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the order of entry of the game medium into the general winning area and other winning areas.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the CPU in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold specific area and hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result specification command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol and the temporary stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution timing of each button effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the button effect setting table at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect setting table at the time of reach establishment, and the button effect setting table at the time of a hit or fail. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the continuous hit button effect setting table and the long press button effect setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation promotion notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the button effect at the time of a hit or fail. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the detection valid period end notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the operation part production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation part effect setting table. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. (A) It is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by the prize number management table, and (b) is a figure which shows the prize number information which is managed by a display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the playground setting and the player setting. It is explanatory drawing in the case of setting the display by the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the prize in the general prize opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each effect which is executed according to the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 1st effect form to the 4th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 5th effect form to the 8th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 9th effect form to the 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect form to the 16th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th effect form to the 20th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st effect form to the 24th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form. It is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by the prize number management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the point giving effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form to the 30th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect form to the 36th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th effect form to the 41st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the non-winning notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of the characters A to C in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is a figure which shows the display period of the characters A to C in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation result notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each effect in the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous hit operation notification and the cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo-continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo-continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the all symbol stop operation notification and the chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the all symbol stop operation notification and the chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each advance notice effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the winning number information which can be displayed in the 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of the aggregation period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information and the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information and the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows in more detail various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. .. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the combination / role ratio related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the combination / combination display control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of characters acquired by a character, and the number of balls acquired by a continuous character. (A) to (D) are front views which simplified the modification of the main board.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and is formed by the player. A stick controller 122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. The stick controller 122 is designated by a player holding the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pressing and pulling the stick controller 122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operating rod of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 125 (FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 121 or the like. 3) is built-in. Further, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

The member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation by a player, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be moved to either the left or right side of the upper plate or the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 is not the big hit symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second symbol display area 9c for which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later. A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variation display of the effect symbol varies on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the production using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the variation display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production is diversifying, such as the production of the production and the production of a movable object blocking all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is it currently in the state of being in the variable display by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Whether or not it can be reliably recognized. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

When the gaming machine is configured so that the movable member is provided in the game area, the fourth symbol is displayed in the area where the visual recognition is not hindered regardless of the position of the movable member in the game area. It may be configured so as to.

The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the "fourth symbol", and the fourth symbol display area 9c and the first symbol for the first special symbol are used. 2 The fourth symbol display area 9d for a special symbol may be collectively referred to as a “fourth symbol display area”.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized with each other. "Synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (display color different from the missed, for example, the missed). Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. The display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probabilistic big hit or a normal big hit). , The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a jackpot that can be expected to win a game ball to the jackpot (for example, a jackpot other than a sudden probability change jackpot), and for multiple types of jackpots with different numbers of rounds. If it is controllable, the display color may be different according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game. Further, even if the number of rounds of each jackpot is the same as in this embodiment, the number of rounds of each jackpot may be the same. For example, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is short (for example, 1 second), and the big hit that can not be expected to win the game ball to the big winning opening is practically, and the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. (For example, 30 seconds) If there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball in the big winning opening, depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the big winning opening. The display color may be different. For example, depending on the number of times the large winning opening is opened per round, there are a large hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the large winning opening and a big hit that cannot be expected. In this case as well, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a prize in the large winning opening.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the missed, for example, the missed). Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. The display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probabilistic big hit or a normal big hit). , The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a jackpot that can be expected to win a game ball to the jackpot (for example, a jackpot other than a sudden probability change jackpot), and for multiple types of jackpots with different numbers of rounds. If it is controllable, the display color may be different according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game. Further, even if the number of rounds of each jackpot is the same as in this embodiment, the number of rounds of each jackpot may be the same. For example, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is short (for example, 1 second), and the big hit that can not be expected to win the game ball to the big winning opening is practically, and the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. (For example, 30 seconds) If there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball in the big prize opening, depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the big prize opening. The display color may be different. For example, depending on the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, there are a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening and a big hit that cannot be expected. In this case as well, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a prize in the large winning opening.

The display color of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d when the lights are turned off is a display color different from the background image (for example, black) in order to prevent the display colors from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing when the lights are turned off. It is desirable to have.

In this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the fluctuation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it may be indicated whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are associated with each other and separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, a fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized by using a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which different display colors are repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example. , The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by displaying the lights and turns off repeatedly at different time intervals. Further, for example, the same jackpot symbol is used when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol. However, the stop symbol of a different mode may be stopped and displayed.

On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is displayed. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol", and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are referred to as "special symbol display (variable display unit)". ) ”.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can win a prize in the second starting winning opening 14 (it becomes easier to win a starting prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 13 than the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a "starting winning opening" or a "starting opening".

When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second starting winning opening 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first starting winning opening 13 may be further narrowed, or the first starting winning opening may be further narrowed. By arranging the nails densely around 13 or making it difficult to guide the game ball to the 1st start winning opening 13 regarding the arrangement of the nails around the 1st starting winning opening 13, the winning rate of the 2nd starting winning opening 14 It may be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 14 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second are provided. A variable winning ball device that opens and closes each of the starting winning openings 14 may be provided.

Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second hold storage number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided, and a first special symbol hold storage display 18a including four indicators is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, an area (total hold storage display unit) 18c for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. Is provided. In this embodiment, since the total hold storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition. .. In addition, instead of the total reserved storage number display unit 18c, a first reserved storage display unit for displaying the first reserved storage number and a second reserved storage display unit for displaying the second reserved storage number are provided. You may.

In this embodiment, the total hold storage display unit 18c shows a case where the display is displayed without distinguishing whether the hold display corresponds to the first hold storage or the hold display corresponds to the second hold storage. However, it may be possible to distinguish between the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage. For example, in this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in the normal mode, it is uniformly black without distinguishing between the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage. In the case of displaying the round display of, the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory is displayed in the black circle display, while the hold display corresponding to the second hold memory is displayed in the yellow circle display. It may be distinguishable by displaying. Further, for example, the shape of the hold display may be different between the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the production symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 forming a large winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1. Furthermore, the probability variation state is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased as compared with the normal state). Then, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased even in a time saving state (a game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) in which the fluctuation time of the symbol is shortened although it is not in the probabilistic state.

At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts on the outside of the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7. In this embodiment, the effect sound can be output at least at three types of volumes: low volume, medium volume, and high volume. Further, in this embodiment, the frame LED 28 can be turned on by at least three kinds of colors, white, red, and rainbow colors.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting ball operation handle 5 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 7 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, the game state is shifted to the high probability state (probability variation state), and the game ball is easily started and won a prize (that is, the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect). It shifts to a high base state which is a game state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display in the display device 9 is easily satisfied (in this embodiment, it shifts to a time saving state).
Also, when the gaming state is changed to the time saving state, it is also changed to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a start prize.

It should be noted that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), the state shifts to a normal symbol probability variation state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability change state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the starting winning is easy to win (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 10 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 increases, and the start winning is easy to win (high base state).

In addition, by shifting to a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol or the effect symbol starts. It can be done more frequently (in other words, the reserved memory is digested faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, a valid start winning prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a starting prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 also includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all of the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). NS. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is the time when the numerical data is read (extracted), it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value.

The random number circuit 503 has a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection function. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random number can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as ROM 54 (ID number assigned by a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained above is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

Further, an input driver circuit 58 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the effect display device 9 that receives the effect control command and variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the sound output board 70. Controls the sound output of.

As will be described later, the effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 125 included in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, and the push sensor 124 included in the push button 120. However (see FIG. 3), the illustration is omitted in FIG.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by the power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CG ROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. .. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on the signal for driving the LED.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice or a sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs the sound to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1).
Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs game state restoration processing (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing) is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, the data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer). ), The part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command specifying a display result (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, small hit, or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44).
Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 9). You may try to do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the value of the variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the saved fluctuation time timer is restarted, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is restarted, and the data is saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been set timed out, a symbol confirmation specification command, which will be described later, is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the saved special symbol process flag.

The CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of always transmitting the display result specification command when the power failure is restored. .. Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that there is a power failure during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, the fluctuation is occurring during the power failure. It may be determined that the state is not present and the display result specification command may not be sent.

Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs during a power failure. It may be determined that it was not inside, and the display result specification command may not be sent.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10).
By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random number R, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and it is displayed. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to determine. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed by using the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of a sudden probability variation jackpot, the sudden probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, "135") is not a reach. May be displayed as stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern using random numbers. do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power supply cutoff signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating "○" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not reach the reach state may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally out of place") variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect may be executed after the reach state is reached, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "out of reach".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9 (however, in the case of a sudden probability change jackpot). In some cases, the probability change jackpot symbol (for example, "135") is stopped and displayed without becoming a reach.

When the small hit "5" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "suddenly probable big hit" in the effect display device 9. After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the same manner as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability change big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a variable display mode of "small hit". ..

Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to a number of times that the number of times the big winning opening is opened is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game is completed, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state or transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state. Further, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened a small number of times in the big hit game state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely long. A short jackpot and a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probabilistic state. Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By controlling in this way, if the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so it is a high probability state for the player. (Probability change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach". Fluctuation patterns of reach PA1-4 are prepared. Further, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2 and normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2, and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2. As shown in FIG. 6, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4, which is used when the reach is not reached and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, is re-variated once.
Among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-1 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-2 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily stop the effect symbol that is temporarily out of alignment from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, and then re-execute the variable display of the effect symbol. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the variable patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the jackpot symbol are normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4 and normal PB2-3 to normal. Fluctuation patterns of PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 are prepared. There is. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3 and the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when a sudden probability change jackpot occurs. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns used when the sudden change is not a big hit and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-3 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-4 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3, which is used in the case of a sudden probability change jackpot and is accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, is re-variated once.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is 32. It is fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example. , The fluctuation time may be different depending on the total number of reserved storages. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the fluctuation time may be shortened as the total number of reserved storages increases. Further, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be different according to the first reserved storage number. 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the variable time may be made different according to the second reserved storage number. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved storage numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved storage numbers 3 and 4). The determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number to make the fluctuation time different.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) (for jackpot type determination) (2) Random 2 (MR2): type (type) of fluctuation pattern (For fluctuation pattern type judgment) (3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time) (for fluctuation pattern judgment) (4) Random 4 (MR4): Generate a hit based on a normal symbol Determine whether or not to let (normal symbol hit judgment) (5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation is determined by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). Determine one of the fluctuation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process.

The fluctuation pattern type is a group of a plurality of fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of the fluctuation mode. For example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by reach type and divided into a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super reach. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of the pseudo-ream, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without a pseudo-ream, a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of one re-variation, and a re-variation. It may be divided into a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of two fluctuations and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of three re-variations. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a sliding effect.

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the big hit type determination random number (1) and the ordinary symbol hit determination random number (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display (random 2, random 3) or random numbers for initial values (random 5). In addition, random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in this embodiment, as the jackpot determination random number, a random number generated by the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (may be external hardware of the game control microcomputer 560) is used. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of the hardware random number.

FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a time saving state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

8 (B) and 8 (C) are explanatory views showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol and a small hit determination table used when displaying the variation of the second special symbol. (For the second special design).
Each numerical value shown in FIG. 8 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in FIG. 8 (C) in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

It should be noted that the small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probabilistic state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. If a small hit is generated even when the game state is shifted to the probabilistic state, and if it is configured to incite whether or not the game state is probable, even though the current game state is in the probabilistic state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoyed. Therefore, if it is configured so that small hits do not occur during the variable display of the second special symbol, it is difficult for small hits to occur when the game state is in the probable change state, and the fanning effect for the probable change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels annoyed.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 8A. If any of the jackpot determination values is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for big hit determination matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C), it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is entered and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as "small hit" is high.

8 (D) and 8 (E) are explanatory views showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Of these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a of the case. Further, FIG. 8 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b set the jackpot type to "normal jackpot" or "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining either "probability change jackpot" or "sudden change jackpot". In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), 5 determination values are assigned to the “sudden probability change jackpot” in the jackpot type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In contrast to the jackpot type judgment table 131b, one judgment value is assigned to the "sudden probability change jackpot" (1/40 percentage). (Suddenly determined to be a probabilistic jackpot).
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is entered and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the fluctuation display is executed, the rate of being determined as "sudden probability change jackpot" is high. It should be noted that the "sudden probability change jackpot" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and the "sudden probability variation jackpot" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (that is, , "Sudden probability change jackpot" may be determined only when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability change jackpot as a first specific game state in which a predetermined amount of game value is given, and an amount larger than the game value. In some cases, it may be determined as a 15-round normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot as the second specific gaming state that gives the game value, and the first specific gaming state is performed at a high rate when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. However, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the permissible amount of the number of winnings (count number) of the game ball to the large winning opening per round is increased as the game value is determined. May be good. Further, for example, the second specific game state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per big hit during the big hit is lengthened as compared with the first specific game state may be determined. Further, for example, even in the same 15-round big hit, the first specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened once per round and the second specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times per round are defined. It may be prepared and the game value of the second specific game state may be increased by substantially increasing the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in either the first specific game state or the second specific game state, when the large winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific game state). In the case of the second specific game state, an undigested round remains), and an effect of a mode that encourages whether or not the jackpot continues further may be executed. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, all 15 rounds are internally completed, so the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, undigested rounds remain internally. Therefore, the big hit game may be continued (as if the opening of the big winning opening was additionally started with a bonus after finishing the big hit of 15 times opening).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" as jackpot types. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types, 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to the ones. For example, a 10R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 10-round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 7-round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 5-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the big hit types are three types of "normal big hit", "probability change big hit" and "sudden change big hit" is shown, but the case is not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. On the contrary, the number of jackpot types may be less than three, and for example, only two types may be provided as jackpot types.

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifts only to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state ends (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, the probability change state is shifted and the time is shortened. The transition is performed. See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

Further, the "sudden change jackpot" is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened less than the "normal jackpot" and the "probability change jackpot" (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit to be done. That is, in the case of "sudden probability change big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal jackpot" and "probability jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot per round is as long as 29 seconds, while in "sudden jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot per round is long. It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that a game ball will win a prize at the big prize opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden end of the probabilistic jackpot gaming state, the probabilistic state is shifted to the probabilistic state (in this embodiment, the probabilistic state is shifted and the time is shortened as well. Step S169, which will be described later, See S170). Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

The mode of the sudden change jackpot is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times the big winning opening is opened may be 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as a normal big hit or a sudden change big hit, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be extremely short, 0.1 seconds.

As described above, in this embodiment, even when a "small hit" occurs, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, resulting in a big hit game state due to the "sudden probability change big hit". Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of a "small hit", the gaming state does not change after the two opening of the large winning opening is completed, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a "sudden change big hit" or a "small hit", and the interest of the game is improved. When all the big hit types are configured to be probabilistic big hits, it is not necessary to provide small hits. In addition, when a small hit is provided when all the big hit types are probabilistic big hits, the sudden probabilistic big hit is only shifted to the probabilistic state (high probability state) and is not accompanied by the time saving state (high base state). (The opening pattern of the big winning opening is also the same for the sudden change big hit and the small hit).

The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and are judgment values corresponding to each of "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" (big hit type judgment value). ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

9 and 10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6 is given a unique number, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and the type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a "special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command)". The variable pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Upon receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a power failure recovery designation command if the data is saved in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send a command.

The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating the customer waiting demonstration display.

The commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, for designating the start of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, a jackpot start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is used depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability big hit", and the small hit in the case of "sudden change big hit" or "small hit". / Sudden change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a fanfare designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot start designation when it is a sudden big hit, it may be configured not to send a fanfare designation command when it is a small hit. good.

The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) indicating the display during the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the large winning opening opening designation command, a different large winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the large winning opening) indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the designated command after opening the large winning opening, a different designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the jackpot game, a designation command (A201 (H)) is transmitted after opening the jackpot to specify round 1, and when ending the tenth round during the jackpot game. Is transmitted a designated command (A30A (H)) after opening the large winning opening that designates round 10.

The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, designating the end of the jackpot game. The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending the jackpot game by "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot". The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to send an ending designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot end designation when it is a sudden probability change jackpot, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. May be good.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the probability change state. The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that the first start prize has been awarded. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command) for designating that the second start prize has been awarded. In this embodiment, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as "start prize designation command" below.

The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total hold storage number designation command) for designating the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.
"XX" in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total hold storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the total hold storage number is subtracted by 1. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total hold storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total hold storage number subtraction designation command, but does not use the total hold storage number subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total number of pending storages, a command for specifying the total number of pending storages after subtraction may be sent.

In this embodiment, as a command for designating the number of reserved memories, a case of transmitting a command for specifying the total number of reserved storages for specifying the total number of reserved storages is shown. It may be configured to send a command that specifies the number of pending storages that has increased. Specifically, when the first hold storage increases, the first hold storage number specification command for specifying the first hold storage number is transmitted, and when the second hold storage increases, the second hold storage number is specified. The second hold storage number designation command may be transmitted.

Further, in this embodiment, as the hold storage information, a start prize designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 has been started is transmitted, and the total number of pending storages is also transmitted. Although the case where the total number of reserved storage number designation command for specifying is transmitted is shown, the effect control command to be transmitted as the reserved storage information is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved storages increases, the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number is increased. While sending the specified command), when the number of reserved storages decreases, the 1st reserved storage number or the 2nd reserved storage number subtraction specification command (1st reserved storage number subtraction specification command or) indicating that the 2nd reserved storage number has decreased. The second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70 according to the contents shown in FIGS. 9 and 10. do.

For example, the game control microcomputer 560 specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol each time a start prize is given and the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

As a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 one byte at a time with eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wavy) capture signal (effect control INT signal) instructing the capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of capturing 1-byte data by the interrupt process.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special. It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and the effect display is performed according to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts such as the device 9, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

11 and 12 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 starts the first start winning opening 13 if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, the first starting winning opening 13. If a prize has been won, the first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passing process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any of the processes of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (total hold storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, control is performed to transmit a fluctuation pattern command according to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

Display result specification command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

Processing during special symbol change (step S303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 100. Controls the transmission of the specified command, and updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Special symbol stop processing (step S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 22), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, while controlling the transmission of the large winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the large winning opening opening processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game. Further, since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening, a different command for specifying the opening for the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the large winning opening, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to send a designated command to the effect control microcomputer 100 after the jackpot is opened, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this). In the example, update to 7).

Jackpot end processing (step S307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release preprocessing (step S308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the large winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is performed by the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hit opening process (step S309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the grand prize opening. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and the number of times the big winning opening is opened still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S310 (10 in this example).

Small hit end process (step S310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Of these, FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the process of passing the first start port switch in step S312. Further, FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the process of passing the second start port switch in step S314.

First, the process of passing the first start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (A). In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first (Whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the number of hold storage numbers is 4) is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total pending storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) for storing the winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Data indicating "first" is set in the area (step S1214A).

In this embodiment, when the first start port switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set. When the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins in the second start winning opening 14,) data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating "first" when the first start port switch 13a is turned on in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as the data indicating “second”. In this case, if there is no corresponding hold storage, 00 (H) is set in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

FIG. 14A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area). As shown in FIG. 14A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Note that FIG. 14A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 14A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total hold storage number counter value is secured in the hold specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first winning opening 13 or the first 2 Data indicating that the winning order is "first" or "second" is set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14B) (see FIG. 14B). Step S1215A). In the process of step S1215A, a random R (random number for determining a jackpot) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random number 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area.
It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random number 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 14B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number, and a variation. A random number for determining the pattern type (random 2) and a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) are stored. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1216A), sets the value of the total hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and sets the total hold storage number designation command. Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1217A).

Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (B). In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold). It is confirmed (whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter for counting the number of storages is 4) (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating "second" in the area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1214B).

Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14B) (see FIG. 14B). Step S1215B). In the process of step S1215B, a random R (random number for determining a jackpot) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random number 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area.
It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random number 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1216B), sets the value of the total hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and sets the total hold storage number designation command. Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1217B).

15 and 16 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage counter is checked. If the total number of pending storages is 0, the CPU 56 determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last stop of the variable display if the customer waiting demo designation command has not yet been transmitted. Confirm (step S51A). Whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the last stop of the variable display is determined, for example, by setting a predetermined timer when the variable display is finished (for example, in the special symbol stop process described later), and in step S51A. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not this predetermined timer has timed out. If a predetermined period has elapsed since the last change display was stopped, the CPU 56 controls to send a customer waiting demo designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51B), and ends the process. .. For example, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted in step S51B, the CPU 56 sets the customer waiting demo designation command transmission flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, step S51A is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. , S51B processing may be controlled so as not to be executed. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag may be reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first data among the data set in the holding specific area (see FIG. 14A) is the data indicating "first". (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "first" (that is, the data indicating the "second") (N in step S52), the CPU 56 uses the special symbol pointer (third). Data indicating "second" is set in the flag) indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

By executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol is changed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. The display or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case is shown, the variation display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be preferentially executed. In this case, for example, in the case of shifting to the high base state, it becomes easy to start winning a prize in the second starting winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15, and the second reserved memory tends to be accumulated. The variable display of the special symbol may be preferentially executed.

In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed as described above, it is not necessary to memorize the winning order. Therefore, the reserved storage specific information storage shown in FIG. 14 (A) is stored. The area (reserved specific area) is not required.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and in the hold specific area and the first hold storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the hold specific area and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted. do.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Further, the CPU 56 adds up the values (values indicating "first" or "second") stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of pending storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of reserved storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of reserved storages = 1 to 8.

Then, the CPU 56 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the probability change state background specification command when the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set, and if the probability change flag is not set, the time saving state background designation command is transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the normal state background specification command if neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set.

Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table (previously set in the ROM for each command) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to the pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, the effect control micro is performed in the order of the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total hold storage number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. It will be transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background specification command is first transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms, the display result specification command is transmitted after 4 ms, and then 4 ms later. The total hold storage number subtraction specification command is sent. When the special symbol variation is started, the symbol variation specification command (first symbol variation specification command, second symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be standardized between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 56 reads a random number R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for jackpot determination extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passage process and step S1215B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with a random number for big hit judgment, and if they match, executes a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the number of jackpot determination values is probabilistically changed between the jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set to be less than the hour jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" or a "sudden change jackpot", and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Then, after the big hit game is completed, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the process of determining the small hit is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (B). ) Is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. .. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, as the table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of the plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to use the type (“normal jackpot”, “probability variation”) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Sudden probability change big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passage process and step S1215B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number to determine the jackpot type. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ratio of sudden change jackpots is high.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "sudden probability change jackpot", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, any one of the jackpot symbols "1", "3", and "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden probability change jackpot", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when it is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, when the "probability change jackpot" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined is shown, but the method of determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is this. It is not limited to the one shown in the embodiment. For example, if a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is associated with the jackpot type is prepared in advance and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. It may be configured so that the type is also determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 selects a jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types. (Step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as the table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types (step S94). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S95). The time saving flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state or the time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is finished. Specifically, when it is decided to make a "normal jackpot", a time saving flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Further, after the jackpot game is completed, it is reset when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) is completed. Even before the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs. Further, when it is determined to be "probability change big hit" or "sudden change big hit", the probability change flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storage is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for deviation during normal operation as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types. Select a table (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 serves as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types, and the variation pattern for loss during shortening is used. The type determination table is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state or the time saving state (in this embodiment, when shifting to the probabilistic state, the time saving state is always set. (Refer to steps S169 and S170), if it is determined to be Y in step S95, it may be in a probabilistic state or controlled only in a time saving state). As a table used to determine one of a plurality of types, a variation pattern type determination table for loss of time is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S99 is executed and the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern type determination table for loss during shortening is executed. Is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the variation pattern type determination table for loss during the time saving is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type for shortening variation may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and when the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined, the variation is performed in the process of step S102. Non-reach PA1-2 of shortened variation is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 6). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a time saving state, or when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortened variation may be performed. In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state or the time saving state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories are different tables. However, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

In this embodiment, even when the game state is a probability change state or a time saving state, when the total pending memory number is almost 0 (for example, when it is 0, 0 or 1). May not display the variation of the shortened variation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, it confirms whether or not the total number of reserved storages is almost 0, and if the total number of reserved storages is almost 0, it is for deviation from the normal time. The variation pattern type determination table may be selected.

Next, the CPU 56 reads random number 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer), and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S100).

Next, the CPU 56 uses one of the hit variation pattern determination tables or the out-of-variation variation as a table used to determine the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. The pattern determination table is selected (step S101). Further, by reading random number 3 (random number for determining variation pattern) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer) and referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101, the variation pattern Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 56 is a random number counter for determining the fluctuation pattern for generating the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random number 3). The value may be directly extracted from, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "first". Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

In the case where it is determined to be out of order, instead of suddenly determining the fluctuation pattern type, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, the processes of steps S95 to S100 may be executed based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, and the variation pattern type may be determined. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The fluctuation pattern type may be determined.

In addition, when deciding whether or not to reach by lottery processing using a random number for reach determination, the reach is determined according to the total number of reserved storages (the number of first reserved storages or the second number of reserved storages may be used). Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected to determine whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation production control commands (see FIG. 9) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S110). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, whether or not it is a "normal jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing. .. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). It should be noted that whether or not it is a "probability variation jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer is "02" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing. .. Then, when it is neither "normal jackpot" nor "probability jackpot" (that is, when it is "suddenly probabilistic jackpot"), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 4 designated command (step S115).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when it is off, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S118).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the total hold storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total hold storage number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, that the total hold storage number subtraction specification command was transmitted when the total hold storage number subtraction specification command was transmitted in step S1122 described later. The combined hold storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag indicating the above is set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the total hold storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Further, in this case, the set total hold storage number subtraction designation command transmission flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the jackpot end processing described later when the variable display of the special symbol is terminated or the jackpot is terminated. do it.

Next, if the total hold storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 controls to send the total hold storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if set, has a probability variation flag indicating that it is in a probability variation state, a time reduction flag indicating that it is in a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. The time reduction counter indicating the above is reset (step S132), and control is performed to send a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133).
Specifically, when the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", the jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of big hit is suddenly probable big hit, a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). Judgment is based on.

Further, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability change big hit" and 2 times in the case of "sudden change big hit") is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (step S135). .. In addition, the round time per round in the jackpot game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305) (step S136).

If the jackpot flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter indicating the variable number of times of the special symbol in the time reduction state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by -1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit by, for example, the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time for each large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds, which is the same as the round time of the sudden change big hit, is set as the opening time per big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control is performed to transmit the jackpot end designation command (step S162). Here, if it is a "normal jackpot" or a "probability change jackpot", a jackpot end specification command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is a "sudden probability variation jackpot", a small hit / sudden probability variation jackpot The end specification command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is terminated.

In step S164, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot ending this time is a normal jackpot (step S166). In addition, whether or not it is a "normal jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing. .. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction counter (step S168).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (step S169), and sets the time saving flag to shift to the time saving state. (Step S170).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the processing during special symbol change is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. Since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is set in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. Further, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol variation display is used. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 100, the display result designation command transmission process also fluctuates. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the time timer.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and is based on the fact that the end flag is set. It is also possible to set special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). .. After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (step S705). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 9 (including the display control of the effect symbol). To execute.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol (step S707).

After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S702.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.
In this embodiment, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 using parallel signal lines, but the configuration is limited to such a configuration. Instead, for example, it may be configured to output effect control command data using a serial signal line.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start designation commands (big hit start designation command, small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 is set to the received jackpot start designation command. The corresponding flag is set (step S622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is received, the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, and the small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command (command A002 (H)) is executed. If received, set the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start specification command reception flag.

If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot end designation commands (big hit end designation command, small hit / sudden probability change jackpot end designation command) (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 is set to the received jackpot end designation command. The corresponding jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step S624).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S628). For example, if the received production control command is the first start prize designation command, the reception flag of the first start prize designation command is set, and if the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command, the second start prize designation command is set. Set the receive flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. 23. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. It should be noted that even if the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed by different effect control process processes. good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is executed depending on which effect control process process is executing the variation display of the effect symbol.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

Processing during effect symbol change (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Processing during the round (step S805): Display control during the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

Round post-processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 26. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step S812), and sets the value of the effect control process flag to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801). Update to the value (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, in normal times, the display result designation command is transmitted. , The effect symbol variation start processing is started based on the reception of the variation pattern command, and the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Therefore, the effect symbol variation only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the variation pattern command. The display does not start.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 26. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays a display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). That is, by executing the process of step S8001 by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step S8001. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. In addition, as the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream, a symbol dedicated to the pseudo-ream that is used only as the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream may be provided in place of or in addition to the chance eye symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 30, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 is stopped. As a symbol, a combination of production symbols in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols (“2”, “4”, “6” or “8”) is determined. If the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 has 3 symbols as stop symbols. The combination of the effect symbols aligned with the same odd-numbered symbols ("1", "3", "5" or "7") is determined.

If the received display result specification command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result specification command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "off" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), the combination of the effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, the combination of the effect symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol. Further, a symbol that reminds us of being in a probabilistic state (an odd number symbol in this embodiment) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol that reminds us that it will not be in a probabilistic state (an even symbol in this embodiment) is a non-probable variation symbol. Also called.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, and determines the effect mode when executing (step S8003a). Then, when it is determined to execute the high-speed fluctuating button effect (Y in step S8003b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the high-speed fluctuating button effect (step S8003c), and performs high speed. A high-speed fluctuating button effect standby flag indicating that it is determined to execute the fluctuating button effect is set (step S8003d).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the button effect when the reach is established, and the effect mode when executing (step S8004a). Then, when it is determined to execute the button effect when the reach is established (Y in step S8004b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the effect mode of the determined button effect when the reach is established (step S8004c), and reaches. The button effect standby flag at the time of reach establishment, which indicates that it is determined to execute the button effect at the time of establishment, is set (step S8004d).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the button effect at the time of hit / miss, and the effect mode when executing (step S8005a). Then, when it is determined to execute the hit / miss button effect (Y in step S8005b), the effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the determined effect mode of the hit / miss button effect (step S8005c), and the result is correct or not. The right / wrong button effect standby flag indicating that it is decided to execute the button effect at the time of fanning is set (step S8005d). In addition, in this embodiment, if it is a fluctuation pattern including super reach, the button effect at the time of hit / miss is always executed.

Next, if the effect control CPU 101 has a variation pattern including the super reach A (Y in step S8006a), the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the continuous hit button effect (step S8006b). Then, when it is determined to execute the continuous striking button effect (Y in step S8006c), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the continuous striking button effect (step S8006d), and executes the continuous striking button effect. A continuous hit button effect standby flag indicating that the determination is made is set (step S8006e). In this embodiment, if the variation pattern includes the super reach A, the continuous hit button effect is always executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the long-press button effect (step S8007b) if it is a variation pattern including the super reach B (Y in step S8007a). Then, when it is determined to execute the long-press button effect (Y in step S8007c), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the long-press button effect (step S8007d), and the long-press button A long push button effect standby flag indicating that it is determined to execute the effect is set (step S8007e). In this embodiment, if the variation pattern includes the super reach B, the long press button effect is always executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S8008.

The button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reach establishment, the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the continuous hit button effect and the long press button effect are accompanied by an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the push button 120, and are performed by the push button 120 during the detection valid period. It is an effect that is executed based on the performance of a predetermined operation. Hereinafter, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reach establishment, the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the continuous hit button effect, and the long-press button effect are collectively referred to as "button effect". In this embodiment, "promotion" is used not to mean to proceed with the operation of the player, but to to encourage (solicit) the operation of the player.

In the high-speed fluctuation button effect, the reach establishment button effect, and the hit / fail button effect, when the detection valid period corresponding to each button effect is started, the effect display device 9 prompts the operation of the push button 120. (For example, a first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 and a second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character are displayed in any of a plurality of modes. A)-(D)). Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 is detected at least once during the detection valid period, the button effect image at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect image at the time of reach establishment, or the button effect image at the time of hit / miss (for example, a big hit). An image suggesting the possibility of becoming) is displayed.

Further, in the continuous striking button effect, when the corresponding detection valid period is started, the effect display device 9 performs an operation promotion notification for encouraging the continuous striking operation of the push button 120 (see FIG. 34 (E)). .. Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 is detected a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the detection valid period (that is, based on the repeated hitting of the push button 120), the continuous hitting button effect image (that is, based on the repeated hitting of the push button 120). For example, an image suggesting the possibility of a big hit. In this example, a dialogue A image, a dialogue B image, or a dialogue C image (see FIG. 33 (A)) is displayed.

Further, in the long-press button effect, when the corresponding detection valid period is started, the effect display device 9 performs an operation promotion notification for prompting the long-press operation of the push button 120 (FIG. 34 (F)). reference). Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 is continuously detected for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) during the detection valid period (that is, based on the long press of the push button 120), A long-press button effect image (for example, an image suggesting the possibility of a big hit. In this example, an item A image, an item B image, or an item C image. See FIG. 33 (B)) is displayed.

Hereinafter, the button effect image at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect image at the time of reach establishment, the button effect image at the time of hit / fail, the continuous hit button effect image, and the long-press button effect image are collectively referred to as a “button effect image”. Further, the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 displayed as the operation promotion notification and the second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character are collectively referred to as an "operation promotion image".

In this embodiment, all the button effects are executed based on the operation performed by the push button 120. For example, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is performed by the push button 120. The button effect when the reach is established may be executed based on the operation performed by the trigger button 121. That is, each button effect may be an effect executed when a different operation means is operated.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timing of each button effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the high-speed fluctuation button effect is executed before the reach state is reached. In addition, the button effect when the reach is established is executed after the reach state is reached. In addition, the hit / miss button effect is executed after the start of the hit / miss effect that incites whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), the continuous hit button effect is executed during the execution of the super reach A and before the start of the hit / miss effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the long-press button effect is executed during the execution of the super reach B and before the start of the hit / miss effect.

In this embodiment, the high-speed fluctuation button effect and the reach-established button effect may or may not be executed even when the super reach is executed. , Whenever Super Reach is executed, it is executed. Further, when the super reach A is executed, the continuous hit button effect is always executed, and when the super reach B is executed, the long press button effect is always executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and even when the super reach is executed, the button effect at the time of hit / miss may not be executed at a certain ratio, or when the super reach A is executed. Even so, the continuous hit button effect may not be executed at a constant rate, or even when the super reach B is executed, the long press button effect may not be executed at a constant rate.

The timing of executing each button effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31, and may be any timing during fluctuation. Further, for example, the timing of executing the button effect may be any timing during the jackpot game. In addition, when the button effect is executed during the big hit game, it may be suggested that the number of rounds is increased or the probabilistic state or the time saving state is controlled after the big hit game based on the detection of the predetermined operation. good.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a button effect setting table at the time of high-speed fluctuation, a button effect setting table at the time of reach establishment, and a button effect setting table at the time of hit / miss. Further, FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the continuous hit button effect setting table and the long press button effect setting table. Further, FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation promotion notification.

In step S8003a, using the high-speed fluctuation button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32 (A), it is determined whether or not to execute the high-speed fluctuation button effect, and the effect mode when executing (“no effect”, “no effect”, “ It is determined to be one of "first effect mode", "second effect mode", and "third effect mode"). It should be noted that the determination of "no effect" means that the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is not executed, and any of the "first effect mode", "second effect mode", and "third effect mode". The determination is to determine that the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is executed in the effect mode of the "first effect mode", "second effect mode", or "third effect mode".

In the high-speed fluctuation button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32 (A), determination items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, and “third effect mode” are set for each fluctuation pattern. ) Is assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 32 (A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of simplification of the explanation. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for setting the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 32 (A), the numerical values corresponding to the determination items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, and “third effect mode”) in each variation pattern are , Shows the percentage (%) at which each decision is selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 33 (A), in the case of a fluctuation pattern that does not include super reach (for example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern other than Super PA3-1 to PA3-4 and Super PB3-1 to PB3-4 shown in FIG. 6). ), It is determined not to execute the high-speed fluctuating button effect at a rate of 90%, and it is determined that the high-speed fluctuating button effect is executed at a rate of 10% in the "first effect mode". Further, in the case of out of super reach (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of Super PA3-1 to PA3-2 or Super PB3-1 to PB3-2 shown in FIG. 6), the high-speed fluctuation button is displayed at a rate of 30%. It was decided not to execute the effect, and it was decided to execute the high-speed fluctuating button effect in the "first effect mode" at a rate of 40%, and the high-speed fluctuating button effect was performed in the "second effect mode" at a rate of 25%. It is determined to execute, and it is determined to execute the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation at a rate of 5% in the "third effect mode". Further, in the case of per super reach (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of Super PA3-3 to PA3-4 or Super PB3-3 to PB3-4 shown in FIG. 6), the high-speed fluctuation button is displayed at a rate of 15%. It was decided not to execute the effect, and it was decided to execute the high-speed fluctuating button effect in the "first effect mode" at a rate of 20%, and the high-speed fluctuating button effect was performed in the "second effect mode" at a rate of 50%. It is determined to execute, and it is determined to execute the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation at a rate of 10% in the "third effect mode".

In this embodiment, in addition to the high-speed fluctuation button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32 (A), the reach-established button effect setting table shown in FIG. Judgment values are actually assigned to the hour button effect setting table, the continuous hit button effect setting table shown in FIG. 33 (A), and the long press button effect setting table shown in FIG. 33 (B), but the explanation is simplified. The ratio of the judgment values assigned to the conversion is shown. Further, also in step S8004a, step S8005a, step S8006b, and step S8007b in which those tables are used, the effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number, and a determination value matching the extracted random number is obtained in the same manner as in step S8003a. Decide on the assigned items.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), in this embodiment, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation can be executed in the effect mode of the "first effect mode", the "second effect mode", or the "third effect mode". .. In the high-speed fluctuation button effect, the small button image of the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 (hereinafter, the first operation promotion) is used as an operation promotion notification in any of the effect modes. An image (also referred to as small)) is displayed (see the first operation promotion image (small) 201a in FIG. 34 (A)). Further, when the operation is detected within the detection valid period, the first high-speed fluctuation button effect image showing the characters "..." is displayed in the "first effect mode", and the "second effect mode" is displayed. Then, the second high-speed fluctuating button effect image showing the character "?" Is displayed, and in the "third effect mode", the third high-speed fluctuating button effect image showing the character "!" Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first high-speed fluctuation button effect image, the second high-speed fluctuation button effect image, and the third high-speed fluctuation button effect image may be collectively referred to as "high-speed fluctuation button effect image".

Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), in this embodiment, the button effect at the time of reach establishment can be executed in the effect mode of "first effect mode", "second effect mode", or "third effect mode". Is. In the button effect when the reach is established, the medium-sized medium-sized button image of the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 (hereinafter, the first operation promotion) is used as an operation promotion notification in any of the effect modes. An image (also referred to as middle)) is displayed (see the first operation promotion image (middle) 201b in FIG. 34 (B)). Further, when the operation is detected within the detection valid period, the button effect image at the time of establishment of the first reach indicating the characters "chance!" Is displayed in the "first effect mode", and in the "second effect mode", the button effect image is displayed. The button effect image at the time of establishment of the second reach indicating the characters "opportunity!" Is displayed, and the button effect image at the time of establishment of the third reach indicating the characters "super heat!" Is displayed in the "third effect mode". Hereinafter, the button effect image when the first reach is established, the button effect image when the second reach is established, and the button effect image when the third reach is established may be collectively referred to as the "button effect image when the reach is established".

Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), in this embodiment, the button effect at the time of hit / miss can be executed in the effect mode of "first effect mode", "second effect mode", or "third effect mode". Is.
In the "first effect mode" of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) is displayed as the operation promotion notification (see FIG. 34 (B)), and the "second effect mode". Then, as the operation promotion notification, a large-sized large button image (hereinafter, also referred to as a first operation promotion image (large)) of the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 and a predetermined character are shown. The second operation promotion image (press) showing the characters of "press" in the second operation promotion image is displayed (first operation promotion image (large) 201c, second operation promotion image (FIG. 34 (C)). (Press) See 202a), in the "third effect mode", as an operation promotion notification, a "blow" of a large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and a second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character. The second operation promotion image (blow) showing the characters of is displayed (see the first operation promotion image (large) 201c and the second operation promotion image (blow) 202b in FIG. 34 (D)). In addition, when the operation is detected within the detection valid period, a button effect image at the time of hit / miss is displayed according to the display result of the variation display. In this example, when the display result is out of alignment, the first hit / miss button effect image (see the first hit / fail button effect image 204a in FIG. 42 (D1)) indicating the characters “defeat ...” is displayed. If the display result is a big hit, the second hit / miss button effect image (see the second hit / miss button effect image 204b in FIG. 42 (D2)) showing the characters “win!” Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first hit / miss button effect image and the second hit / miss button effect image may be collectively referred to as "win / fail button effect image".

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), in this embodiment, the continuous hit button effect can be executed in the effect mode of the "first effect mode", the "second effect mode", or the "third effect mode". .. In the continuous hit button effect, in any of the effect modes, the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and the "continuous hit" of the second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character are used as the operation promotion notification. The second operation promotion image (continuous hit) showing the characters of is displayed (see the first operation promotion image (small) 201a and the second operation promotion image (continuous hit) 202c in FIG. 34 (E)). Further, when the continuous striking operation is detected within the detection valid period, the dialogue A image (also referred to as the first continuous striking button effect image) is displayed in the "first effect mode", and the dialogue B is displayed in the "second effect mode". An image (also referred to as a second continuous hit button effect image) is displayed, and a serif C image (also referred to as a third continuous hit button effect image) is displayed in the "third effect mode". Hereinafter, the first continuous hit button effect image, the second continuous hit button effect image, and the third continuous hit button effect image may be collectively referred to as a "continuous hit button effect image".

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), in this embodiment, the long-press button effect can be executed in the effect mode of the "first effect mode", the "second effect mode", or the "third effect mode". be. In the long-press button effect, in any of the effect modes, the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and the "long" of the second operation promotion image showing the predetermined characters are used as the operation promotion notification. A second operation promotion image (long press) indicating the characters "press" is displayed (see the first operation promotion image (small) 201a and the second operation promotion image (long press) 202d in FIG. 34 (F)). If a long press operation is detected within the detection valid period, the item A image (also referred to as the first long press button effect image) is displayed in the "first effect mode", and the item A image (also referred to as the first long press button effect image) is displayed in the "second effect mode". The item B image (also referred to as the second long-press button effect image) is displayed, and the item C image (also referred to as the third long-press button effect image) is displayed in the "third effect mode". Hereinafter, the first long-press button effect image, the second long-press button effect image, and the third long-press button effect image may be collectively referred to as a “long-press button effect image”.

What is characteristic of each button effect setting table shown in FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (C) is that the fluctuation pattern including super reach is more characteristic than the fluctuation pattern not including super reach, and the display result is out of alignment. It is determined that the one with a big hit is more likely to be determined as "first production mode", "second production mode", or "third production mode", and lower is determined to be "no production". The value is set. Further, the case where the display result is a big hit rather than the off-set is more likely to be determined as the "second effect mode" than the "first effect mode" and as the "third effect mode" than the "second effect mode". The judgment value is set so as to be. By having such a feature, when the production is executed, the "second production mode" and the "second production mode" are further more than when the production is not executed. When executed in the "third effect mode" rather than in the "aspect", the ratio of the advantageous effect symbol variation mode (for example, developing into super reach) is increased, and the display result becomes a big hit. The ratio can be increased. That is, the "second production mode" is higher than the "first production mode", and the "third production mode" is more highly expected than the "second production mode". Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reach establishment, and the button effect at the time of hit / miss are executed, and which production mode is executed. It can be noticed.

Further, what is characteristic of the continuous hit button effect setting table and the long press button effect setting table shown in FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (B) is that the display result is a big hit rather than a loss, which is the "first effect mode". The determination value is set so that the ratio of being determined as the "third effect mode" is higher than that of the "second effect mode" and the "second effect mode". By having such a feature, it is displayed more when it is executed in the "second production mode" than in the "first production mode" and in the "third production mode" rather than in the "second production mode". The rate at which the result is a big hit can be increased. That is, the "second production mode" is higher than the "first production mode", and the "third production mode" is more highly expected than the "second production mode". Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to which effect mode the continuous hit button effect and the long press button effect are executed.

In this embodiment, a first pattern for displaying only the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 and a second pattern for displaying the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character are displayed. It is possible to execute the operation promotion notification by the above. Specifically, in the first effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern, and in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. As described above, in this embodiment, the second effect mode and the third effect mode are configured to have higher expectations than the first effect mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation is higher when the operation promotion notification is performed in the second pattern than in the first pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which pattern the operation promotion notification is performed. Further, in the operation promotion notification by the first pattern, only the first operation promotion image is displayed, and in the operation promotion notification by the second pattern, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image are displayed, so that they are displayed. As the number of images increases, the degree of expectation increases, and the degree of expectation can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, the operation promotion notification of the first pattern may be configured to have a higher degree of expectation than the operation promotion notification of the second pattern.

Further, in this embodiment, the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. Specifically, any of a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)), a medium button image (first operation promotion image (medium)), and a large button image (first operation promotion image (large)). The middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) is displayed in the first effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / fail, and the large button is displayed in the second effect mode and the third effect mode. An image (first operation promotion image (large)) is displayed. Then, the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first operation promotion image is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the mode of the first operation promotion image, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in this embodiment, the second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character can also be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Specifically, in the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the second operation promotion image (press) is displayed, and in the third effect mode, the second operation promotion image (blow) is displayed. Then, the degree of expectation of the second operation promotion image also differs depending on which of the plurality of modes is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the mode of the second operation promotion image, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in this embodiment, since the first operation promotion image and the second promotion image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, the operation promotion notification according to the second pattern is executed in any one of the plurality of modes. It can be said that it can be done. Specifically, in the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / fail, the operation is promoted by the second pattern by displaying the large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and the second operation promotion image (press). In the third effect mode, the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern by displaying the large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and the second operation promotion image (blow). Then, the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the second patterns of the plurality of modes is used for the operation promotion notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in which mode the operation promotion notification by the second pattern is performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation promotion notification is performed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different ratios depending on the timing when the button effect is executed (that is, the timing when the operation promotion notification is performed). It is configured in. Specifically, at the timing when the button effect when the high-speed fluctuation is executed and the timing when the button effect when the reach is established are executed, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern at a rate of 100%, and the button effect at the time of winning or failing is performed. When the display result is out of alignment, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern (the second pattern at the rate of 30%) at a rate of 70%, and when the display result is a big hit. The operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern (the second pattern at the rate of 65%) at a rate of 35%. Then, in this embodiment, the later the operation promotion notification is performed, the higher the ratio of the second pattern is performed, and the higher the degree of expectation is. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the operation promotion notification is performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32, the operation promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at the timing when the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation and the button effect at the time of reach establishment are executed. It may be configured.

In this embodiment, the timing to be executed is determined for each button effect. For example, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation can be executed at a plurality of timings during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol, or the reach is established. When it is possible to execute the button effect when the reach is established at a plurality of later timings, the first pattern and the second pattern are performed at different ratios depending on the timing when the button effect when the high speed fluctuates and the button effect when the reach is established are executed. The operation promotion notification may be performed by any of the above. Further, even in such a configuration, the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern the operation promotion notification is performed (for example, the ratio of the display result to be a big hit is different). It may be.

Further, in this embodiment, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reach establishment, and the button effect at the time of hit / fail are executed based on the fact that the push button 120 is pressed once during the detection valid period. However, the continuous hit button effect is executed based on the repeated hit operation of the push button 120 during the detection valid period, and the long press button effect is performed by the long press operation of the push button 120 during the detection valid period. It is executed based on what was said. Therefore, when the continuous hit button effect is produced, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image (continuous stroke) prompting the continuous operation are displayed as the operation promotion notification, and when the long press button effect is performed, the first operation promotion notification is displayed. Along with the operation promotion image, a second operation promotion image (long press) that encourages a long press operation is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player the necessary operation in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, one type of operation promotion notification mode is provided for each of the continuous hit button effect and the long push button effect, but a plurality of modes may be provided. For example, the operation promotion notification of the continuous hit button effect may be executed by displaying the first operation promotion image (middle) and the second operation promotion image (continuous hit). Further, in this case as well, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the mode of the operation promotion notification.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, whether or not to execute each button effect by dividing the fluctuation pattern into three types, a fluctuation pattern that does not include super reach, a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach, and a fluctuation pattern that is per super reach. , However, the method of dividing the fluctuation pattern is not limited to this. For example, among the fluctuation patterns that do not include super reach, the fluctuation patterns that do not include reach, the fluctuation patterns that include normal reach, and the fluctuation patterns that include normal reach that the display result is a hit or miss are added. Then, whether or not to execute each button effect and the mode of the effect when the button effect is executed may be determined. Also, regarding the fluctuation pattern including super reach, whether or not to execute each button effect and the effect mode when executing each button effect are determined according to the type of super reach (in this example, super reach A or super reach B). You may try to do it.

For example, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31B, even if the fluctuation pattern does not include the super reach, each button effect may be executed at a constant ratio as long as the fluctuation pattern includes the normal reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, it is divided into two types, super reach A off (super reach B off) and super reach A per (per super reach B), and whether or not to execute each button effect is executed. Although the production mode has been determined, the method of dividing the fluctuation pattern is not limited to this as described above. That is, even in the case of a variation pattern other than Super Reach A or Super Reach B, the continuous hit button effect or the long press button effect may be executed.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31C, the hit / miss button effect may not be executed at a constant rate even when the super reach is off or the super reach is hit. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32 (A), the continuous hit button effect may not be executed at a constant rate even when the super reach A is off or the super reach A is hit. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32 (B), the long-press button effect may not be executed at a constant rate even when the super reach B is off or the super reach B is hit.

In this embodiment, the operation of the player is detected depending on whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected. Alternatively, a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor may be used to detect the movement of the player. Further, in this case, the mode is not limited to the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 34, and for example, an image imitating the appearance of the stick controller 122 and an image showing the character "close" are displayed, or a hand is held over the sensor. The operation promotion notification may be performed by displaying an image imitating a state and an image showing the characters "hold your hand". Further, in this case, the movement of the player who triggers the execution of the effect may be different depending on the degree of expectation. For example, the effect executed based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 122 at the time of winning or failing is expected to be higher than the effect executed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120. You may.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the example of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 34, and for example, together with the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and the middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) An operation promotion notification that displays a second operation promotion image indicating a character such as "blow" may be performed. In this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the combination of the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image. For example, the operation promotion notification in which the first operation promotion image (small) and the second operation promotion image (press) are displayed is better than the operation promotion notification in which only the first operation promotion image (small) is displayed. Further, the first operation promotion image (small) and the second operation promotion image (blow) are displayed rather than the operation promotion notification in which the first operation promotion image (small) and the second operation promotion image (press) are displayed. The operation promotion notification may have a higher degree of expectation.

Further, for example, when the operation promotion notification is performed in a specific mode, the big hit may be confirmed. Specifically, when a specific first operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating a golden push button 120) is displayed, or a specific second operation promotion image (for example, the characters "PUSH!") Are shown. When the image) is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, although the jackpot is not confirmed when displayed alone, the operation promotion notification may be performed so that the jackpot is confirmed when displayed in combination. Specifically, when only the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) is displayed, the big hit is not confirmed, but the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and the second operation When the promotion image (blow) is displayed (when a combination with high rarity is displayed), the big hit may be confirmed.

Further, even if the operation promotion notification has the same aspect, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the timing of execution. Specifically, the operation promotion notification that displays the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) has a low expectation when it is performed at the time of high-speed fluctuation, but the expectation is high when it is performed at the time of a hit or miss ( For example, the jackpot will be confirmed).

In step S8008 of the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step S8008), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8009).

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table shown in FIG. 35 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

In this embodiment, since each button effect is realized by executing a predetermined process (for example, the process of steps S8106 to S8175 described later) in the effect symbol changing process, any button effect is achieved. In step S8008, the process table according to the fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of whether or not the above is executed. It is also possible to store scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) according to the presence or absence of each button effect in advance, and execute processing based on the data to realize each button effect. However, by adopting the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to realize each button effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

Further, in this embodiment, a case where each button effect can be executed as an effect during fluctuation will be described. It may be decided whether or not to execute, and the advance notice effect may be executed based on the decision result. When it is decided to execute such a notice effect, the process table corresponding to the notice effect may be selected in step S8008. That is, even if scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) corresponding to the presence or absence of each advance notice effect is stored in advance and processing is executed based on the data, the advance notice effect can be realized. good.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8010). For example, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8011).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8012).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

36 to 40 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the high-speed fluctuating button effect valid flag indicating that the detection valid period of the high-speed fluctuating button effect is being set is set (step S8106). If the button effect valid flag at the time of high-speed fluctuation is set, the process proceeds to step S8113.

If the high-speed fluctuation button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the high-speed fluctuation button effect standby flag is set (step S8107). If the button effect standby flag at the time of high-speed fluctuation is not set, the process proceeds to step S8120.

When the high-speed fluctuation button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation button effect (that is, the detection valid period start timing of the high-speed fluctuation button effect). Confirm (step S8108). If it is not the start timing of the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S8120.

When it is the start timing of the button effect during high-speed fluctuation, that is, when it is the start timing of the detection valid period of the button effect during high-speed fluctuation, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect standby flag during high-speed fluctuation (step S8109). At the same time, the button effect valid flag at the time of high-speed fluctuation is set (step 8110). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) as an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9, and the remaining period of the detection valid period. Control is performed to display the remaining valid period image indicating (steps S8111 and S8112). After that, the process proceeds to step S8113.

In this embodiment, the remaining validity period of the detection validity period is shown by updating and displaying the remaining validity period image in which the ratio of the indicated area in the meter display area is different according to the remaining period of the detection validity period. It is configured. That is, the meter display area in the remaining valid period image shows the total detection valid period, and the indicated area shows the remaining period of the detection valid period. Specifically, when the detection valid period is started, the remaining valid period image in which the indicated area occupies the entire area of the meter display area (for example, the remaining valid period image 203 shown in FIG. 43 (A1). The black-painted area indicates. (Corresponding to the area) is displayed, and the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area decreases as the remaining period of the detection valid period decreases. When the detection valid period ends (or when a predetermined operation is detected) when the image 203) is displayed, the remaining valid period image in which the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area is 0 (for example, FIG. 43 (for example, FIG. 43). The remaining validity period image 203) shown in C1) is displayed. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining period of the detection valid period by checking the state of the remaining valid period image. In this embodiment, the remaining valid period image (for example, the remaining valid period image 203 shown in FIG. 43 (C1)) in which the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area is 0 is also referred to as an effective period end image. By displaying the valid period end image, the detection valid period end notification is performed to notify that the detection valid period has expired.

In step S8113, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8113). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect display device 9 in the effect symbol change start process, and high-speed according to the memorized high-speed change button effect effect mode. Control is performed to display the variable time button effect image (for example, “...”, “?” Or “!”. See FIG. 32 (A)) (step S8114). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining valid period image (step S8114a).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed operation promotion image (step S8115). Further, in the effect control CPU 101, in the effect display device 9, the instruction area shown in the valid period end image (for example, FIG. 43 (C1)) is a meter as a detection valid period end notification for notifying that the detection valid period has expired. The remaining valid period image 203) in which the ratio to the display area is 0) is displayed (step S8116). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect valid flag at the time of high-speed fluctuation (step S8117). The button effect image and the valid period end image at the time of high-speed fluctuation are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period. For example, a timer is set when displaying a high-speed fluctuating button effect image or an effective period end image, and when a predetermined period is clocked by the timer, control is performed to delete the high-speed fluctuating button effect image or the valid period end image. It is realized by.

If the operation of the push button 120 is not detected in step S8113, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the button effect during high-speed fluctuation (that is, the end timing of the detection valid period of the button effect during high-speed fluctuation). It is confirmed whether or not (step S8118). Then, if it is the end timing of the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S8115. Further, if it is not the end timing of the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining valid period image according to the remaining period of the detection valid period (step S8119). For example, as the remaining period decreases, the remaining valid period image in which the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area decreases is displayed (see FIG. 43 (B1)). After that, the process proceeds to step S8120.

In step S8120, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the reach-established button effect valid flag indicating that the reach-established button effect detection is valid is set (step S8120). If the button effect valid flag is set when the reach is established, the process proceeds to step S8127.

If the reach-established button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the reach-established button effect standby flag is set (step S8121). If the button effect standby flag at the time of reach establishment is not set, the process proceeds to step S8134.

When the reach-established button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the reach-established button effect (that is, the start timing of the detection valid period of the reach-established button effect). Confirm (step S8122). If it is not the start timing of the button effect when the reach is established, the process proceeds to step S8134.

When it is the start timing of the button effect when the reach is established, that is, when the detection valid period start timing of the button effect when the reach is established, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect standby flag when the reach is established (step S8123). At the same time, the button effect valid flag is set when the reach is established (step 8124). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays a middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) as an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9, and also displays a remaining valid period image. Control is performed (steps S8125, S8126). After that, the process proceeds to step S8127.

In step S8127, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8127). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start process in the effect display device 9, and reaches according to the effect mode of the stored reach establishment button effect. Control is performed to display the button effect image at the time of establishment (for example, “chance!”, “Opportunity!”, Or “super heat!”. See FIG. 32 (B)) (step S8128). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining valid period image (step S8128a).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed operation promotion image (step S8129). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has expired on the effect display device 9 (step S8130). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect valid flag when the reach is established (step S8131). The button effect when the reach is established and the image at the end of the valid period are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

If the operation of the push button 120 is not detected in step S8127, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the button effect when the reach is established (that is, the end timing of the detection valid period of the button effect when the reach is established). It is confirmed whether or not (step S8132.). Then, if it is the end timing of the button effect when the reach is established, the process proceeds to step S8129. Further, if it is not the end timing of the button effect when the reach is established, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining valid period image according to the remaining period of the detection valid period (step S8133). After that, the process proceeds to step S8134.

In step S8134, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the hit / miss button effect valid flag indicating that the detection valid period of the hit / miss button effect is being set is set (step S8134). If the button effect valid flag at the time of hit / miss is set, the process proceeds to step S8141.

If the hit / miss button effect effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the hit / miss button effect standby flag is set (step S8135). If the right / wrong button effect standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8148.

When the hit / fail button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the hit / miss button effect (that is, the start timing of the detection valid period of the hit / miss button effect). Confirm (step S8136). If it is not the start timing of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the process proceeds to step S8148.

When it is the start timing of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, that is, when it is the start timing of the detection valid period of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect standby flag at the time of hit / miss (step S8137). At the same time, the button effect valid flag is set at the time of hit / miss (step 8138). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays the operation promotion image in the mode in which the operation promotion image is determined as the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9 (for example, the middle button image (first operation promotion image). Display only (middle)), large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and second operation promotion image (press), or large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and first 2 Displaying the operation promotion image (blow)) and controlling the display of the remaining valid period image (steps S8139, S8140). After that, the process proceeds to step S8141.

In step S8141, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8141). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start process in the effect display device 9, and determines whether the effect is correct or not according to the effect mode of the button effect at the time of the stored hit / miss. The fanning button effect image (for example, the first hit / fail button effect image 204a showing the characters "defeat ..." or the second hit / fail button effect image 204b showing the characters "win!". FIG. 42 (D1). , (See (D2))) is displayed (step S8142). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining valid period image (step S8142a). In addition to or in addition to the example shown in this embodiment, in the process of step S8142, if it is a big hit, a predetermined movable accessory is operated, and if it is out of the way, a predetermined movable accessory is operated. You may not move things. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit (or in the case of a probabilistic big hit), a predetermined movable accessory is operated according to the first pattern, and in the case of an outlier (or in the case of a normal big hit), the predetermined movable accessory is operated. The accessory may be operated by a second pattern different from the first pattern.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed operation promotion image (step S8143). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has expired on the effect display device 9 (step S8144). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect valid flag at the time of hit / miss (step S8145). In addition, the button effect image and the valid period end image at the time of hit / fail are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

Further, in step S8141, when the operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the button effect at the time of hit / miss (that is, the end timing of the detection valid period of the button effect at the time of hit / miss). It is confirmed whether or not (step S8146). Then, if it is the end timing of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the process proceeds to step S8143. Further, if it is not the end timing of the button effect at the time of hit / fail, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining valid period image according to the remaining period of the detection valid period (step S8147). After that, the process proceeds to step S8148.

In step S8148, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous hit button effect valid flag indicating that the detection valid period of the continuous hit button effect is being set is set (step S8148). If the continuous hit button effect valid flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8155.

When the continuous hit button effect effective flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous hit button effect standby flag is set (step S8149). If the continuous hit button effect standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8162.

When the continuous hit button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous hit button effect (that is, the start timing of the detection valid period of the continuous hit button effect) (step S8150). .. If it is not the start timing of the continuous hit button effect, the process proceeds to step S8162.

When it is the start timing of the continuous hit button effect, that is, when it is the start timing of the detection valid period of the continuous hit button effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous hit button effect standby flag (step S8151) and enables the continuous hit button effect. Set the flag (step 8152). Further, the effect control CPU 101 includes a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and a second operation promotion image (continuous hitting) as operation promotion notifications for prompting the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9. Is displayed, and control is performed to display the remaining valid period image (steps S8153 and S8154). After that, the process proceeds to step S8155.

In step S8155, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the repeated hitting operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8155). When the continuous hitting operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start process in the effect display device 9, and the repeated hit button is determined according to the memorized continuous hit button effect effect mode. Control is performed to display an effect image (for example, a dialogue A image, a dialogue B image, or a dialogue C image; see FIG. 33 (A)) (step S8156). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining valid period image (step S8156a).

In step S8155, it is determined whether or not the repeated hitting operation of the push button 120 is detected, for example, by confirming whether or not the operation detection signal is received from the push sensor 124 a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period. .. Further, the effect display device 9 may display a meter or the like according to the number of operations so that the number of times the push button 120 is operated within the detection valid period of the continuous hit button effect can be recognized. With this configuration, the meter value increases with each operation, so that the player can feel the effect of the continuous striking operation and can improve the effect of the effect. Further, in a configuration in which a meter is displayed, for example, a lottery may be performed each time the push button 120 is operated, and the meter value may be increased when a prize is won (for example, a prize is won at a rate of 1/10). Further, for example, the jackpot may be confirmed when the meter value reaches the maximum value as a result of the continuous striking operation. In this case, when the display result is not a big hit and the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90% of the maximum value), the meter value is not increased even if the pressing operation is performed, or the lottery is not won. It may be configured as. It is desirable to provide a case where the meter value does not reach the maximum value even when the display result is a big hit. By doing so, even if the meter value does not reach the maximum value, the possibility of a big hit remains, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Further, the meter display by the continuous hit button effect may be utilized for the hit / fail fanning effect or the hit / miss button effect performed after the continuous hit button effect. For example, a hit / fail effect or a hit / fail button effect that incorporates a meter display by a continuous hit button effect may be executed, and a larger meter value has a higher expectation and rarity. The button effect may be executed. With this configuration, the relevance between the productions can be enhanced, and the production effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, the continuous hit button effect is configured so that the continuous hit button effect image is displayed when the push button 120 is operated a predetermined number of times within the detection valid period. For example, the detection valid period. A lottery is performed every time the push button 120 is operated, and when the lottery is won (for example, a winning rate of 1/100), the continuous hit button effect image may be displayed. That is, in order to increase the number of lottery times and increase the possibility of winning, it may be advantageous to repeatedly hit the push button 120.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed operation promotion image (step S8157). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays an effect period end image indicating that the detection effective period has expired on the effect display device 9 (step S8158). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous hit button effect effect flag (step S8159). The continuous hit button effect image and the valid period end image are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

Further, in step S8155, when the continuous hitting operation of the push button 120 is not detected, whether or not the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the continuous hit button effect (that is, the end timing of the detection valid period of the continuous hit button effect). Is confirmed (step S8160). Then, if it is the end timing of the continuous hit button effect, the process proceeds to step S8157. Further, if it is not the end timing of the continuous hit button effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining valid period image according to the remaining period of the detection valid period (step S8161). Then, the process proceeds to step S8162.

In step S8162, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the long press button effect valid flag indicating that the long press button effect detection valid period is being set is set (step S8162). If the long press button effect valid flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8169.

If the long-press button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the long-press button effect standby flag is set (step S8163). If the long-press button effect standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8176.

When the long-press button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the long-press button effect (that is, the start timing of the detection valid period of the long-press button effect) (that is, the start timing of the long-press button effect detection valid period). Step S8164). If it is not the start timing of the long push button effect, the process proceeds to step S8176.

When it is the start timing of the long-press button effect, that is, the start timing of the detection valid period of the long-press button effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the long-press button effect standby flag (step S8165) and is long. The push button effect valid flag is set (step 8166). Further, the effect control CPU 101 has a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and a second operation promotion image (long press) as operation promotion notifications for prompting the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9. And control to display the remaining valid period image (steps S8167, S8168). After that, the process proceeds to step S8169.

In step S8169, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the long press operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8169). When the long-press operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start process in the effect display device 9, and determines according to the memorized long-press button effect effect mode. Control to display a long-press button effect image (for example, an item A image, an item B image, or an item C image; see FIG. 33 (B)) is performed (step S8170). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining valid period image (step S8170a).

In step S8169, the determination of whether or not the long press operation of the push button 120 is detected is, for example, whether the operation detection signal is continuously received from the push sensor 124 for a predetermined period (shorter than the detection valid period). It is done by confirming whether or not. For example, whether or not the long press operation of the push button 120 has been detected is determined by whether or not the cumulative total of the periods in which the push button 120 has been pressed within the detection valid period has reached a predetermined period (shorter than the detection valid period). It may be done by confirming whether or not. In addition, the effect display device 9 performs meter display or the like according to the long-pressed operation period so that the period during which the push button 120 is long-pressed can be recognized within the detection valid period of the long-pressed button effect. You may do so. For example, when the long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the meter display is performed so that the meter value by 10% of the total scale increases. With this configuration, the meter value increases when the long press operation is continued, so that the player can feel the effect of the long press operation and can improve the effect of the effect. For example, in the latter half of the detection valid period, if the long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the meter value of 20% of the total scale may be increased on the meter display, or the long press operation may be 0. . If performed for 2 seconds, the meter value may be increased by 10% of the total scale on the meter display. In this way, by increasing the pace of increase of the meter value during the specific period of the detection valid period, it is possible to easily increase the meter value within the detection valid period. Further, for example, the jackpot may be confirmed when the meter value reaches the maximum value as a result of the long press operation. In this case, when the display result is not a big hit, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90% of the maximum value), the meter value may not be increased even if a long press operation is performed. .. It is desirable to provide a case where the meter value does not reach the maximum value even when the display result is a big hit. By doing so, even if the meter value does not reach the maximum value, the possibility of a big hit remains, and it is possible to enhance the interest. In addition, the meter display by the long-press button effect may be utilized for the hit / miss fanning effect or the hit / miss button effect performed after the long-press button effect. For example, it is possible to execute a hit / fail effect or a button effect at the time of a hit / fail that incorporates a meter display by a long-press button effect. The hour button effect may be executed. With this configuration, the relevance between the productions can be enhanced, and the production effect can be improved.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed operation promotion image (step S8171). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has expired on the effect display device 9 (step S8172). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the long press button effect enable flag (step S8173). The long-press button effect image and the valid period end image are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

Further, in step S8169, when the long press operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the long press button effect (that is, the end timing of the detection valid period of the long press button effect). It is confirmed whether or not (step S8174). Then, if it is the end timing of the long push button effect, the process proceeds to step S8171. Further, if it is not the end timing of the long-press button effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining valid period image according to the remaining period of the detection valid period (step S8175). After that, the process proceeds to step S8176.

In step S8176, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step S8176), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S803). Step S8177).

In this embodiment, when the process of steps S8116, S8130, S8144, S8158, and S8172 is executed in the process during the effect symbol change, and a predetermined operation is performed before the end of the detection valid period. However, since the detection valid period end notification is performed, it is possible to easily recognize that the detection valid period has expired based on the operation.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, after displaying the button effect image, the operation promotion image and the remaining valid period image are deleted, and the valid period end image is displayed (for example, step). S8114 to S8116), for example, the operation promotion image and the remaining valid period image may be erased, the valid period end image may be displayed, and then the button effect image may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation promotion image and the remaining valid period image are deleted at the end timing of the detection valid period of the button effect, but a predetermined period of the end timing of the detection valid period of the button effect is deleted. Previously, the operation promotion image and the remaining validity period image (or only one of them) may be configured to be erased. With this configuration, the operation performed at the timing when the operation promotion image and the remaining valid period image are deleted is not detected as the operation within the detection valid period, and the player feels distrust. Can be avoided.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of confirming and displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S8305.

If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8301a), and if it is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the confirmation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S8301b). In addition, control is performed to confirm and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the effect symbol (step S8302).

Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S8311. do.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received is specifically determined by a flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received (big hit start designation command reception flag). It can be determined by checking whether or not the flag (small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command has been received is set. If any of the jackpot start designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S8307). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1) (step S8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the button effect at the time of hit / miss. FIGS. 42 (A1) to 42 (E1) show specific examples in the case where the right / wrong button effect according to the first effect mode is executed when the display result is out of alignment.

As shown in FIG. 42 (A1), when the hit / miss effect (for example, the effect of fighting an enemy character) is started on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the variable display of the effect symbol in the reach state is displayed at the lower left. It is displayed in reduced size.

Next, when the detection valid period of the hit / miss button effect (first effect mode) is started, the first operation promotion image (middle) 201b (middle button image) is displayed as the operation promotion notification. In addition, the remaining valid period image 203 showing the remaining period of the detection valid period is displayed (FIG. 42 (B1)). Then, in the remaining valid period image 203, the indicator area indicating the remaining period (corresponding to the black-painted area in the example of FIG. 42) corresponds to the meter display area according to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection valid period). It is updated so that its proportion in the total is reduced (Fig. 42 (C1)).

Here, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the first hit / miss button effect image 204a indicating the characters "defeat ..." is displayed, and the final stop symbol ("6" which is the missed symbol) is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. At this time, the first operation promotion image (middle) 201b (middle button image) and the remaining valid period image 203 are deleted, and the valid period end image (the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area) is deleted as the detection valid period end notification. The remaining validity period image 203) in which is 0) is displayed (FIG. 42 (D1)).

After that, the first hit / fail button effect image 204a and the valid period end image (remaining valid period image 203 in which the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area is 0) are erased, and in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The out-of-order symbol "767" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 42 (E1)).

FIGS. 42 (A2) to 42 (E2) show specific examples in the case where the right / wrong button effect according to the third effect mode is executed when the display result is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 42 (A2), when the hit / miss effect (for example, the effect of fighting an enemy character) is started on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the variable display of the effect symbol in the reach state is displayed at the lower left. It is displayed in reduced size.

Next, when the detection valid period of the button effect (third effect mode) at the time of hit / miss is started, the first operation promotion image (large) 201c (large button image) and the second operation promotion image (blow) are used as operation promotion notifications. ) 202b is displayed. In addition, the remaining valid period image 203 showing the remaining period of the detection valid period is displayed (FIG. 42 (B2)). Then, in the remaining valid period image 203, the indicator area indicating the remaining period (corresponding to the black-painted area in the example of FIG. 42) corresponds to the meter display area according to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection valid period). It is updated so that the ratio to the total is reduced (Fig. 42 (C2)).

Here, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the second hit / miss button effect image 204b indicating the characters "win!" Is displayed, and the final stop symbol ("7" which is the jackpot symbol) is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. At this time, the first operation promotion image (large) 201c (large button image), the second operation promotion image (blow) 202b, and the remaining valid period image 203 are deleted, and the valid period end image is used as the detection valid period end notification. (Remaining effective period image 203 in which the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area is 0) is displayed (FIG. 42 (D2)).

After that, the second hit / fail button effect image 204b and the valid period end image (remaining valid period image 203 in which the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area is 0) are erased, and in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The jackpot symbol "777" is stopped and displayed (FIG. 42 (E2)).

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the detection valid period end notification. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to 43 (C1), when the detection valid period is started, the effect display device 9 performs an operation promotion notification (for example, a first operation promotion image (for example, a first operation promotion image). (Middle) 201b is displayed), and the remaining detection valid period image 203 is displayed (FIG. 43 (A1)). Further, in the remaining valid period image 203, the indicator area indicating the remaining period (corresponding to the black-painted area in the example of FIG. 43) corresponds to the meter display area according to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection valid period). It is updated so that the ratio to the total is reduced (Fig. 43 (B1)).

Then, as soon as the operation is detected, the valid period end image (remaining valid period image 203 in which the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area is 0) is displayed (FIG. 43 (C1)).

On the other hand, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 43 (A2) to 43 (D2), when the operation is detected, the valid period end image is not displayed immediately, but the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area is A sharply decreasing remaining validity period image 203 is displayed (FIG. 43 (C2)). Then, after that, the valid period end image (remaining valid period image 203 in which the ratio of the indicated area to the meter display area is 0) is displayed (FIG. 43 (D2)). By performing the display in which the ratio of the indicated area is sharply reduced, the player can easily recognize the change in the meter display area. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the detection valid period ends by the operation, and can also recognize that the operation is completed (the operation of pressing the push button 120 is detected).

The display in which the ratio of the instruction area to the meter display area sharply decreases may be realized by, for example, reproducing a moving image prepared in advance. Also, the speed at which the proportion of the indicated region is rapidly reduced is arbitrary. It suffices to be fast enough for the player to recognize that it is faster than the speed at which the indicated area decreases when no operation is detected.

Further, in addition to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, it may be possible to execute an effect of changing the mode of the push button 120 according to the degree of expectation. For example, the push button 120 is configured to incorporate a white LED, a red LED, and a vibrator (vibration motor) so that the player can see the colors of the white LED and the red LED, and vibrate when the vibrator operates. And. Hereinafter, the effect of changing the mode of the push button 120 is also referred to as an operation unit effect. When executing the operation unit effect, a notification prompting the operation of the push button 120 is performed, and when the operation of the push button 120 is detected (or when the detection valid period elapses), the mode of the push button 120 is changed to the normal state. You may try to put it back.

Further, the operation unit effect and each button effect may be combined and executed. Specifically, when the detection valid period of the button effect is started, the mode of the push button 120 is changed by the operation unit effect, and the operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display device 9 by the operation promotion notification. When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect display device 9 displays the button effect image and erases the operation promotion image, so that the mode of the push button 120 is returned to the normal state.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation unit effect. FIG. 44 (A) shows a case where the operation promotion notification is performed without performing the operation unit effect, and FIG. 44 (B) shows a case where the operation promotion notification is performed while performing the operation unit effect.

When the operation promotion notification is performed without performing the operation unit effect, as shown in FIG. 44A, the effect control CPU 101 uses the operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion) as the operation promotion notification of the button effect. Control is performed to display the image (small) 201a) on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

On the other hand, when performing the operation unit effect and performing the operation promotion notification, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the effect control CPU 101 uses the operation promotion image (for example, the first operation) as the operation promotion notification of the button effect. The promotion image (small) 201a) is controlled to be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the mode of the push button 120 is controlled to be changed from the normal mode as an operation unit effect.

A normal aspect of the push button 120 is a state in which the color is not developed (the white LED and the red LED are turned off) and the vibration by the vibrator is not performed. Therefore, when the mode of the push button 120 is changed from the normal mode, the effect control CPU 101 controls color development by the white LED, color development by the red LED, vibration by the vibrator, or two or more of them. ..

In a configuration in which the operation unit effect can be executed, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process, it is determined whether or not to execute the operation unit effect, and when the operation unit effect is executed, the mode of the operation promotion notification and the mode of the operation unit effect are determined. decide. The mode of the operation promotion notification and the mode of the operation unit effect are determined by using, for example, the operation unit effect setting table shown in FIG. 45.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the operation unit effect setting table. As shown in FIG. 45, the operation unit effect determination table contains determination values corresponding to a combination of the mode of the operation promotion image displayed by the operation promotion notification and the mode of the push button 120 after the change due to the operation unit effect. It is set. Note that FIG. 45 shows an example in which the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 is displayed in different colors / sizes as the operation promotion image. Further, FIG. 45 shows the number of determination values.

For example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines that the button effect is to be executed in the effect symbol variation start process, the mode of the first operation promotion image and the mode of the changed push button 120 are set to the value of the random number for determining the effect of the operation unit. The mode corresponding to the determination value that matches the above is determined. The effect control CPU 101 uses the table shown in FIG. 45 (A) when it is determined not to make the display result of the special symbol a big hit symbol (to make it a big hit symbol), and to make it a big hit symbol (big hit symbol). If it is decided to use the table shown in FIG. 45 (B).

As illustrated in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, the proportion of the push button 120 determined to be "vibration" is larger in the case of a big hit than in the case of a miss. In addition, the number of judgment values corresponding to "red" is more likely to be a big hit than when it is out of order. That is, it is suggested that the push button 120 after the change may be a big hit.

Further, paying attention to the mode of the first operation promotion image, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of being determined to be "red" is larger than in the case of losing. The ratio determined as "red / large" is even larger in the case of a big hit than in the case of a miss.

When the mode of the push button 120 is determined to be "red" (specifically, "red" or "red / vibration"), the mode of the first operation promotion image is "white" (specifically, "white"). , "White / Small" or "White / Large"). That is, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first operation promotion image of the aspect common to the plurality of aspects of the push button 120. Further, even when the mode of the push button 120 is determined to be "white" (specifically, "white" or "white / vibration"), the mode of the first operation promotion image is "white". It may be determined as "white" (specifically, "white / small" or "white / large").

In the example shown in FIG. 45, the "common mode" is "white", but it may be "white / small" or "white / large". That is, a part of the aspect of the first operation promotion image is the same.
However, the "common aspect" may be the exact same aspect.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 101 collectively determines the mode of the first operation promotion image and the mode of the push button 120 after the change, but even if they are determined separately. good. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 determines the mode of the first operation promotion image by, for example, a lottery using random numbers, and determines the mode of the changed push button 120 by a lottery using other random numbers.

Further, when the button effect and the operation unit effect are executed in combination, for example, when determining the effect mode of the button effect to be executed, the mode of the operation unit effect is determined together with the mode of the operation promotion notification of the button effect. You may try to do it. Further, in this case, for example, in the process of changing the effect symbol, when the process of displaying the operation promotion image (step S8111 or the like) is executed, the mode of the push button 120 is changed from the normal mode by the operation unit effect. Control to change the push button 120 may be performed to change the mode of the push button 120 to a normal mode when a process of erasing the operation promotion image (step S8115 or the like) is executed. It should be noted that the operation unit effect may be executed whenever the button effect is executed, or the operation unit effect may be determined whether or not to execute the operation unit effect by, for example, a lottery using random numbers.

When the operation unit effect is configured to be executable as described above, the mode of the push button 120 is changed to one of a plurality of modes according to the degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state, and the mode is changed according to the degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state. Since the first operation promotion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, but the first operation promotion image in a mode common to the plurality of modes of the push button 120 is displayed, it also depends on the degree of expectation for the jackpot gaming state. The display mode of the first operation promotion image is changed to one of a plurality of display modes, and the mode of the push button 120 is changed to one of the plurality of modes according to the degree of expectation for the jackpot gaming state, but the mode of the push button 120. Is set to a mode common to a plurality of display modes of the first operation promotion image (for example, “white” (specifically, “white” or “white / vibration”) shown in FIG. 45, so that an operating means is used. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by directing.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect is produced by combining "red / small" or "red / large" (for the first operation promotion image) and "red" or "red / vibration" (for the push button 120). It will never be executed. If the aspect of the first operation promotion image (red in this case) and the aspect of the push button 120 (red in this case) are the same, the player may expect something, By preventing the operation promotion notification and the operation unit effect from being executed in the same manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player expects something but the event corresponding to the expectation does not occur.

In the example shown in FIG. 45, color development and vibration were used as the types of modes of the push button 120, but the rotation of the push button 120, the protrusion (jumping) of the push button 120, the temperature change of the push button 120, and the push button 120 You may use the hardening of. Further, white and red were used as the colors of the push button 120, and these colors are examples.

Further, the operation unit effect can be executed at an arbitrary timing during, for example, a variable display or a big hit game, and during the variable display, it is executed in a different manner depending on the big hit or the degree of expectation of developing into a super reach. , During the big hit game, the game may be executed in a different manner depending on the increase in the number of rounds and the degree of expectation of shifting to an advantageous game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game.

Further, the operation unit effect is not limited to changing the mode of the push button 120 from the normal mode when the operation promotion notification is performed (that is, before the operation of the push button 120 is detected), for example, an operation. When the operation of the push button 120 is detected after the promotion notification is performed, the mode of the push button 120 may be changed from the normal mode. For example, when the button effect and the operation unit effect are executed in combination, the button effect image is displayed and the push button is displayed when the operation of the push button 120 is detected after the operation promotion notification is performed. The mode of 120 may be changed from the usual mode.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (push button 120 in this example) and the promotion notification for encouraging the movement of the player (in this example). , A predetermined effect (in this example, based on the fact that the movement of the player is detected by the promotion notification means capable of executing the first operation promotion image and the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image) and the detection means. , Each button effect) is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing the effect. Then, the promotion notification means first promotes at least the promotion notification for prompting one operation (in this example, any of the operation of pressing the push button 120 once, the operation of repeatedly hitting, and the operation of pressing and holding the push button 120). A first pattern for displaying an image (in this example, a first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120), and a second promotion image (in this example, showing a predetermined character) in addition to the first promotion image. It can be executed by the second pattern of displaying (2 operation promotion image) (see FIGS. 32 to 34). In addition, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the promotion notification is executed by the first pattern or the second pattern (in this example, the first effect of the button effect at the time of the hit / miss in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern). The degree of expectation is different between the mode and the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. See FIG. 32 (c). Therefore, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation in an easy-to-understand manner.

Specifically, even if the configuration has different expectations depending on the mode of the promotion notification means, the expectation may be difficult to understand, but as in this embodiment, the number of images displayed by the promotion notification means If the degree of expectation is configured to be different depending on the difference (first pattern and second pattern), the player can intuitively recognize the degree of expectation.

In this embodiment, the operation of the player is detected depending on whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected. Depending on this, the movement of the player may be detected. Further, the movement of the player is not limited to the one that detects the movement of the player depending on whether the push button 120, the stick controller 122, or the like is operated a predetermined number of times. For example, predetermined information (for example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, or the like) is used. The movement of the player may be detected depending on whether or not an operation for inputting a specific command or the like is performed. Further, instead of or in addition to the push button 120 and the stick controller 122, a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor that inputs a detection signal when the player's movement is detected is provided, and these sensors are used. The movement of the player may be detected. Further, in this case, the mode is not limited to the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 34, and for example, an image imitating the appearance of the stick controller 122 and an image showing the character "close" are displayed, or a hand is held over the sensor. The operation promotion notification may be performed by displaying an image imitating a state and an image showing the characters "hold your hand".

Further, the fact that the promotion notification for promoting one operation can be executed by the first pattern and the second pattern means that, for example, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of pressing the push button 120 once is the first. It is feasible by the first pattern and the second pattern, and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of pressing the push button 120 once (for example, one operation) can be executed by the first pattern, and the push button. It does not mean that the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of repeatedly hitting 120 (for example, an operation different from one operation) can be executed by the second pattern.

Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification by the second pattern has a higher expectation than the promotion notification by the first pattern (in this example, the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. The 2nd effect mode and the 3rd effect mode are more promising than the 1st effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern. See FIG. 32 (c). With this configuration, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification by the second pattern can be executed by any one of a plurality of modes (in this example, in the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, the first operation promotion image (large). ) And the second operation promotion image (press) are displayed, and the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. The operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern of displaying (blow). (See FIG. 32 (c)). Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced by various productions.

Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification means uses the first promotion image in a plurality of modes (in this example, the first operation promotion image (small), the first operation promotion image (middle), and the first operation promotion image (in this example). It can be displayed by any of (large), etc.), and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first promotion image is displayed (in this example, the first operation promotion image (middle) is displayed. The first effect mode of the hit / fail button effect for displaying the operation promotion notification, and the second effect mode and the third effect mode for the operation promotion notification for displaying the first operation promotion image (large). The degree of expectation is different from the production mode. See FIG. 32 (c)). Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects, and the effect of the effects can be improved by changing the degree of expectation shown for each effect.

Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification means displays the second promotion image in any one of a plurality of modes (in this example, a second operation promotion image (press), a second operation promotion image (blow), etc.). It is possible, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the second promotion image is displayed (in this example, whether or not the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (press) is performed). The degree of expectation is different between the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of fanning and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of fanning, in which the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (blow) is performed. )reference).
Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects, and the effect of the effects can be improved by changing the degree of expectation shown for each effect.

In this embodiment, displaying the first promotion image in any of a plurality of modes means that the first operation promotion image (small), the first operation promotion image (medium), and the first operation promotion image (large) are displayed. ) Is described using an example of displaying, and displaying the second promotion image in any of a plurality of modes is described as a second operation promotion image (press), a second operation promotion image (blow), and a second operation promotion. Although the description has been given using an example of displaying an image (continuous hitting) and a second operation promotion image (long press), examples of a plurality of modes are not limited to this. For example, in the first operation promotion image that imitates the appearance of the push button 120, in addition to the size, the color and the state (for example, the state in which the push button 120 is protruding and the state in which the push button 120 is not protruding) are different. It can be in a different mode. Further, the second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character can have a different mode by changing the size and color in addition to the character.

Further, for example, even if the first operation promotion image imitates the appearance of the push button 120 of the same size, if the process until it is displayed is different, it can be said that the first operation promotion image is displayed in different modes. Specifically, when the small button image is displayed momentarily, when the small button image is displayed changing from a state in which the light and shade is light and invisible to a state in which the density is gradually increased and is easy to see, it is divided. When the small button images are gradually combined and displayed as a whole, when a predetermined sound is output together with the display of the small button image, and when the control is performed to turn on the predetermined light emitter together with the display of the small button image. It can be said that the small button image is displayed in different modes. That is, "displaying the first promotion image (second promotion image) by any of a plurality of modes" is not limited to the one in which the mode is different due to the difference in the image finally displayed, but the difference in the display process. It is a concept including those having different aspects depending on the type.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect at a plurality of timings (in this example, when the effect symbol fluctuates at high speed, when the reach is established, when the result is aggravated, etc.) (see FIG. 31). ), The promotion notification means executes the promotion notification by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different ratios according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed (in this example, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is executed). At the timing when the button effect is executed and the timing when the button effect when the reach is established is executed, the operation promotion notification is executed according to the first pattern at a rate of 100%, and the display result is off at the timing when the button effect at the time of hit / miss is executed. In the case of, the operation promotion notification is executed by the first pattern (the second pattern at the rate of 30%) at a rate of 70%, and when the display result is a big hit, the first pattern (65) at a rate of 35%. The operation promotion notification is executed according to the second pattern) at a rate of%. See FIG. 32). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the operation promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at the timing when the button effect at the time of hit / miss is executed, but at the time of high-speed fluctuation. At the timing when the button effect or the button effect when the reach is established is executed, the operation promotion notification is executed according to the first pattern, and at the timing when the button effect at the time of hit / miss is executed, the operation promotion notification is executed according to the second pattern. You may do so. Further, for example, the operation promotion notification may be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at the timing when the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation or the button effect at the time of reach establishment is executed. In this case, for example, at the timing when the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is executed, if the operation promotion notification is executed by the second pattern, it is confirmed that at least the reach state is reached, and the timing at which the button effect at the time of reach establishment is executed. In the second pattern, when the operation promotion notification is executed, it may be determined that at least the super reach effect is developed.

Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different ratios according to the timing when the predetermined effect is executed, but instead of this. In addition, for example, the promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different ratios according to the game state (time saving state or probability change state) or the difference in the effect mode. May be good

Further, in this embodiment, the detecting means includes an operating means that can be operated by the player (in this example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.), and the effect executing means is determined according to the operation on the operating means. The effect (in this example, each button effect) can be executed, and the validity period notification means for notifying the valid period during which the operation is valid (displaying the remaining valid period image in this example) and the valid period have expired. Occasionally, it is provided with an end notification means that gives an end notification indicating the end of the valid period (in this example, an image of the end of the valid period is displayed), and the end notification means was operated before the end of the valid period. Sometimes the end notification is given. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the valid period has expired based on the operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the detection means includes an operation means that can be operated by the player (in this example, a push button 120, a stick controller 122, etc.), and the effect execution means is an operation effect using the operation means (in this example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.). In this example, when the operation effect executing means for executing the operation unit effect (for example, in the effect symbol changing process, the process of displaying the operation promotion image (step S8111, etc.) is executed, the operation unit effect pushes the button. The promotion notification means includes a promotion image (in this example, a predetermined color and a predetermined size) for prompting the operation when the operation effect is executed, including the control of changing the mode of the button 120 from the normal mode. The operation effect executing means includes a display control means for displaying the first operation promotion image (see FIG. 45) on the display means (in this example, the effect display device 9). (In this example, it is changed to any of "white", "red", "white / vibration", and "red / vibration" shown in FIG. 45), and the display control means displays a plurality of promotion images according to the degree of expectation. (In this example, "white / small", "red / small", "white / large", "red / large" shown in FIG. 45) is displayed, and is common to a plurality of modes of the operating means. It may be configured to have a common image display control means for displaying the promotion image of the mode (in this example, “white” (“white / small” and “white / large”) shown in FIG. 45). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by directing using the operating means.

In this embodiment, the first promotion is a promotion notification for prompting one operation (in this example, any one of the operation of pressing the push button 120 once, the operation of repeatedly hitting the button 120, and the operation of pressing and holding the push button 120). A first pattern for displaying an image (in this example, a first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120), and a second promotion image (in this example, showing a predetermined character) in addition to the first promotion image. It can be executed by the second pattern of displaying (2 operation promotion image), but instead of or in addition to this, the operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display device 9 and a light emitting body such as a predetermined LED or lamp is displayed. The promotion notification may be executed by a pattern of lighting or blinking, a pattern of displaying an operation promotion image on the effect display device 9, and a pattern of outputting a predetermined sound, or a pattern in which these are combined. Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on which pattern the promotion notification is executed.

The timing of executing a predetermined effect (in this example, each button effect) based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and is a pseudo-ream. It may be at any timing, such as during the production, during the pre-reading notice production, or during the jackpot production. Further, also in this case, the promotion notification may be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at different ratios according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed. For example, when a predetermined effect is executed during the pseudo-ream effect, the ratio before and after the temporary stop of the effect symbol in the pseudo-ream effect (or depending on the number of pseudo-reams) is different. The promotion notification may be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern.

Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect (in this example, each button effect) suggests that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the display result of the variation display during the variation display, with different expectations. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be suggested by different expectations that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display based on any of the reserved memories, as in the so-called pre-reading notice. .. For example, by changing the hold display to one of a plurality of display modes based on the fact that the operation is detected during the detection valid period, it may be suggested that the jackpot will be a big hit with different expectations. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of each button effect is determined in the effect symbol change start process, but they may be determined in the effect symbol change process. For example, in the effect symbol change start process, whether or not to execute each button effect and the detection valid period when executing are determined, and when an operation is detected during the detection valid period in the effect symbol change process, The mode of the button effect image may be determined and displayed.

The configuration shown in the above embodiment can also be applied to a game system called a so-called mobile interlocking system. A gaming system called a mobile interlocking system generally provides a gaming machine that outputs predetermined information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and a predetermined privilege to a player based on the predetermined information output by the gaming machine. It is provided with a privilege granting device that performs a granting process.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned gaming system, the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition such as the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the so-called number of consecutive villas (the number of big hits while the probabilistic state is continuing), and the number of mission achievements. It is accumulated as a history, and a two-dimensional code or the like is displayed as predetermined information at the end of the game. In addition, the player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to take a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine and transmits it to a Web server (privilege granting device) on the Internet. Then, the Web server manages the game history of the player based on the received information, and performs a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history. For example, the Web server sends digital contents such as image contents and music contents to the player's mobile terminal as a predetermined privilege, or sends a predetermined password to the player's mobile terminal so that the player can use the next time. When playing a game, a process is performed so that the display screen of the game machine can be customized according to the taste of the player.

When the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied to the game system as described above, for example, it is assumed that the predetermined condition is satisfied that the button effect at the time of hit / miss in the third effect mode is executed and a big hit is obtained. , The number of times may be managed as a game history on the Web server. Then, depending on the number of times the button effect at the time of hit / miss in the third effect mode is executed and a big hit is made, digital contents may be transmitted as a predetermined privilege, or the display screen of the gaming machine may be customized. ..

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the variation time, the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, when the variation is started, 1 Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent.
The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is another substrate (for example, FIG. 4). The sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc., and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35) shown in the above. A control command may be transmitted so as to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control and lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. You may send it to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible. For example, when the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine, an operation promotion image is displayed at an arbitrary timing such as during rotation of a symbol, and a stop button (or an operation button provided separately from the stop button) is displayed. ) Is operated to perform a predetermined effect, such as winning a role (for example, a big bonus or a regular bonus), whether or not there is a freeze effect, the result of the RT (replay time) lottery, and the AT (assist time) lottery. As a result, it may be configured to suggest the result of the ART (assist replay time) lottery. Also in this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the number of operation-promoting images to be displayed (for example, only the first operation-promoting image, or the first operation-promoting image and the second operation-promoting image). Depending on the degree, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image may be configured to be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is obtained in which a gaming medium is used as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize, and is not limited to a gaming ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium such as the above is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown based on the fact that the jackpot type is determined to be probabilistic jackpots. , Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation region may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation region in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. I can't be limited. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed.
Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in addition to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a command that determines whether or not a game control microcomputer 560 will be a big hit and a winning judgment (look-ahead judgment) for a variation pattern type, and indicates the winning judgment result. (Symbol designation command, variable category command) may be transmitted, and the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side based on the command indicating the winning determination result. Further, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a command for specifying only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted when the start winning is generated. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination) based on the value of a random number specified by those commands.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a main board that controls the game (for example, the main board 11, A predetermined area (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B which is a second starting winning opening, a special variable winning ball device 907 which is a large winning opening, a first Regular prize ball device 906A serving as a starting winning opening, general winning openings 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning area), and predetermined prize ball information (for example, a combination of winning balls) related to a winning ball paid out by passing the game medium through the predetermined area. Information display means (for example, display monitor 9029) capable of displaying the combination), detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, push button 120, stick controller 122, infrared sensor, etc.), and the player's Promotion notification means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform steps S8111, S8125,) capable of executing promotion notification (for example, operation promotion notification for displaying a first operation promotion image or a second operation promotion image) for promoting an operation. An effect executing means (for example, game control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, each button effect) based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means and the portion for executing S8139, S8153, S8167). The computer 100 includes steps S8114, S8128, S8142, S8156, and S8170), and the promotion notification means has one operation (for example, an operation of pressing the push button 120 once and an operation of repeatedly hitting the push button 120). The first pattern for displaying at least the first promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120) and the first promotion for prompting the operation of pressing and holding the push button 120. It is feasible by a second pattern that displays a second promotion image (for example, a second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character) different from the first promotion image in addition to the image (see FIGS. 32 to 34). ), The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern executes the promotion notification (for example, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern). The degree of expectation is different between the first effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / miss and the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of hit / miss, in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. FIG. 32 (c). See), the above information Examples of the information display means include a gaming machine characterized in that the information is provided on the main board so as not to interfere with the visibility of the predetermined prize ball information.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize what kind of adjustment has been made to the game nail or the like.
Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the information display means provided on the main board is subjected to the number of big hits, the number of times the promotion notification is performed to promote the movement of the player, and the promotion notification, and the player actually performs the operation. The number of times the game has been performed, the number of times the player has actually performed the operation after the promotion notification has been performed, and the number of times the game has been controlled to the jackpot game state may be displayed.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine in which it is possible to easily recognize what kind of adjustment has been made to a gaming nail or the like, a predetermined area (for example, a predetermined area where a prize ball is paid out when a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) passes through). For example, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 907 which is the big winning opening, the ordinary winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 9050A which is the general winning area. ~ 9050D) and predetermined information (for example, combination, combination ratio) regarding a prize ball provided on a main board (for example, main board 9011) for controlling a game and paid out by passing the game medium through a predetermined area. Examples of the information display means include a possible information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029), and the information display means is provided on a main board for controlling a game so as not to interfere with visibility. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area has an effect on the game as compared with the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the game medium enters. Is low. Further, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, and the game medium enters the specific winning area where the game medium can enter in this advantageous state. Compared to the approach, the interest of the player is low, and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Due to such circumstances, the game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that it is substantially difficult for the game medium to enter the general winning area.

However, on the game machine maker side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it is desirable that the game field side should be in a maintenance state of the game nails so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. It is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. In the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the gaming machine having the general winning area.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 46 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 903a provided on the gaming machine frame 903 so as to be openable and closable.

The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area 9010 surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched and launched into the game area 9010 from a predetermined ball launching device. Further, the game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. The game area 9010 is an area through which the game ball can pass in the game board 902, and the left side is the left game area 9010A and the right side is the right game area 9010B with reference to the center of the game area 9010.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 46, on the right side of the game area 9010). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". .. The number of special symbol display devices may be one.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game are supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a variable display unit divided into three, for example, a decorative symbol that is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified by each is variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, "left" corresponds to the start of either the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A or the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. , "Middle", and "Right", the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R start to change the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 905 are displayed. , The final decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A or the special figure using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. The derivation display of the display result means that the identification information such as the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) to end the variable display.

In the image display device 905, three areas may be provided as display areas to be the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R so that the three areas can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. .. The display operation in the image display device 905 is controlled by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 47.
When the first special symbol display device 904A is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the image display device 905 to execute the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 904B, the image display device 905 executes the effect display along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters. There are numbers "1" to "8", English letters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters or symbols and a character image, and the like. Is composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure.) In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs composed of the characters "abrupt") and blank symbols (also referred to as "2R probable big hits") and blank symbols (also called "2R probable big hits") A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

During the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, the symbol numbers are sequentially changed from the smaller one to the larger one from the upper side to the lower side. A flowing scroll display is performed, and when the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, "1") is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number to display the symbol. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

At the lower right of the display screen of the image display device 905, fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B for displaying the fourth symbol following the decorative symbol, the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. The fourth symbol display area 905A for the second special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is provided.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variable display of the decorative symbol specifies the variable pattern on the effect control CPU 90120 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When performing the effect using the image display device 905, for example, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production has been diversified, such as the production of a moving object that shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 905, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is the state of the fourth symbol currently being variably displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 905? Whether or not it can be reliably recognized. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always variably displayed by a constant operation and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the "fourth symbol", and the fourth symbol display area 905A and the first special symbol for the first special symbol are used. 2 The fourth symbol display area 905B for special symbols may be collectively referred to as the "fourth symbol display area".

In the variable display (variable display) of the fourth symbol, the fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B are displayed in predetermined display colors (for example, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is white, and the second special symbol is the second. 4 The symbol display area 905B is black), and is realized by continuing a blinking state in which lighting (display) and extinguishing (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol are synchronized. "Synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missed symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) in the fourth symbol display area 905A.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missed symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 905B.

A start winning memory display area 905H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold number (special figure hold memory number) of the variable display is performed. Here, the hold of the variable display occurs when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B (starting winning). do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done.

As an example, the start prize memory display area 905H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. There is. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening, the display is hidden. One of the display parts in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display parts in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. Further, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening, the display is hidden. One of the display parts in the mode is changed to a red display. After that, when either the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure (first start condition) or the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second start condition) is satisfied, for example. The display at the leftmost display part is removed, and the display at each display part is moved to the left one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to the blue display or the red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display parts whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

That is, when a start prize occurs, the start prize storage display area 905H contains hold information (objects shown in a circle in FIGS. 46 and 76, etc.) corresponding to the special figure game executed based on the start prize. Display control that is newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start conditions of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information are satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start conditions are satisfied). If a new start prize is generated when n hold information is displayed (when n special figure games are held), the n + 1th hold information from the left corresponds to the new start prize. Will be newly displayed. Then, when the start condition of the reserved special figure game is satisfied, the leftmost reserved information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) reserved information from the left is left one by one. It will be shifted to n-1 and displayed at the n-1st position.

The order in which the start conditions of the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions occur, and the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure is higher than the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority change). On the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure is established with priority over the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority change). You may do it.

In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the player or the like may be able to recognize the special figure holding memory number by displaying a number indicating the special figure holding memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H or in place of the start winning prize storage display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 46, together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A identifiablely displays the first hold storage number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. The second hold indicator 9025B identifiablely displays the second hold storage number as the number of valid start winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. The first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B have, for example, the number (for example, 4) LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values (for example, "4") in each of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number, respectively. Is configured to include. Further, a movable accessory 1000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 905.

The movable accessory 901000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating the star-shaped member. The movable accessory 901000 is adapted to operate (rotate and light) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a variation result advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect, which will be described later, is executed.

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9027 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball does not enter or enters the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. It becomes an easy expansion and opening state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 47. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 47. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 47, and the large winning opening door changes between an open state and a closed state. Form the mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening when the solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door is in the off state. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening when the solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door is on. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. 47. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state. Figure When the start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the variable display is held. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1. The added value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be "total reserved storage number" or "special figure reserved storage number".

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 46, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also called "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). The ordinary symbol display 9020 variably displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols composed of, for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". The ordinary symbol display 9020 is not limited to the one that variably displays numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" as ordinary symbols, for example, "○" and "×". Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the indicated decorative lamps (or LEDs) or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle", and "right" in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gates 9041A and 9041B.

In addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails are provided on the surface of the game board 902. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. There is a winning area.

The general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are composed of ball receiving members projecting forward (player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above through the opening, and the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are not connected in the horizontal direction and pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the distance between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D is such that at least one game ball can pass through. Further, a winning ball device for switching the opening and closing of the openings of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B for switching the opening and closing of the second starting winning opening) is provided. It is always open. Further, even if the game ball wins in the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, neither the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game nor the start condition of the variable display of the normal figure game is satisfied based on the winning.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the winning of the game balls in the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. With the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting winning opening, and a special variable for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening. Activating the winning ball device 907 to facilitate the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening or the large winning opening may be set as the specific value given by the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

Further, the specific value given to the player may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, 5 One prize ball is given, but when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, ten prize balls are given (that is, specific values of different sizes are given. It may be granted). Further, the specific value given when a game ball wins a prize in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening When the game ball wins the 9050D, the normal variable winning ball device 906B or the special variable winning ball device 907 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

Further, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. For example, the winning ball may be executed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Is given, and when the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the type of specific value is different), different effects are executed. May be good. In addition, there are cases where 10 prize balls are given according to the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening, and cases where 5 prize balls are given according to the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening. Different effects may be performed (ie, when the specific values are of different magnitudes).

As shown in FIG. 47, the winning of the game ball into the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the first general winning opening corresponding to each. It is detected by the mouth switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. When game balls are detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls Is paid out as a prize ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball is won in the general winning opening in the game control microcomputer 90100 by providing the winning opening switch corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. It is possible to detect not only what was done, but also which general winning opening the game ball won.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for each general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that the general winning opening provided in the left game area 9010A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. , A common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that the general winning opening provided in the right game area 9010B has been won) is provided for the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It may be. In addition, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that one of the general winning openings has been won) is provided for all the general winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. You may be able to do it.

At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings. The game ball taken into the out port is collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) connecting to the out port. The game balls that have won each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st to 4th general winning opening) are collected through a winning ball set gutter (not shown) and are balls. It is designed to be collected on the game island via the collection passage. An out-ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, the game ball that was driven into the game area 9010 (the game ball that was guided to the out opening without winning any winning opening, and the winning ball set that was won in any winning opening. Game balls collected in the gutter) Detects all game balls. Every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 9012, so that the effect control CPU 90120 totals the number of game balls driven into the game area 9010, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. If the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). By outputting a signal for increasing the number of outs to the board 9012, the number of outs may be totaled in a fixed number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 90120 side.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 are provided around the gaming area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, ordinary winning ball device 906A, ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 903a, there is an upper plate 9060 that holds (stores) the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. It is provided. For example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate 9060 on the front side, an operation button 9030 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is installed.

A keyhole 9061 is provided on the right side of the upper plate 9060. A clerk at the amusement park inserts a key into the keyhole 9061 to open the locking device (not shown), and uses a hinge mechanism to attach the glass door frame 903a to the amusement machine frame 903. It can be opened and closed. By opening the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the game machine frame 903, maintenance of the game board (gauge board including game nails and winning openings) 902 (for example, measures to eliminate ball clogging) and The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032, which will be described later, can be operated.

Immediately below the upper plate 9060, a lower plate 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 9060 is provided, and in the lower right of the upper plate 9060, the game ball as a game medium is directed toward the game area. A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 9063 operated by a player or the like for firing is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle 9063 adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

The operation button 9030 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 9030 is not limited to a push operation or a rotation operation, and may be a touch operation or a pressing operation such as a touch panel, or a tilting operation such as a lever type switch. It may be operable, or it may be capable of pressing and tilting operations such as a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 9030, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 9030 may be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 9030 is a push detection switch (not shown) for detecting the press of the operation button 9030 and a rotary encoder (not shown) for detecting the rotation direction and the amount of rotation of the operation button (jog dial) 9030. Detected by (not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 901, the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 9041A provided in the left game area 9010A and the second passage gate 9041B provided in the right game area 9010B becomes the first passage gate 9041A shown in FIG. 47. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020, such as the detection by the corresponding first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B corresponding to the second passage gate 9041B, is set. After the establishment, the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display 9020 is started based on the establishment of the ordinary symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. NS.

In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time, elapses after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display).
At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses.

In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A, a game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 47. After the first start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. In the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 47. After the second start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started and the predetermined time that becomes the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol Derived display of the finalized special symbol (special symbol display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol (missing symbol) other than the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". ". The specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as the definite special symbol is different depending on the type of the jackpot. For example, the definite special symbol is different between the probable variable jackpot and the non-probable variable jackpot. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game (also simply referred to as a "round") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the jackpot game state in which the jackpot symbol is controlled after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number as the first period. By opening the large winning opening in the period until (for example, 9) winning balls are generated, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player. NS. In this way, the opening / closing plate with the large winning opening open during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. The 907 is changed to a second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the jackpot state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the jackpot, is, for example, 15 times. It should be noted that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of executions of the round game may be provided.

After the jackpot state ends, as one of the advantageous states advantageous for the player, time reduction control is executed in which the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. It is controlled to the time saving state in which the time is shortened, or to the probabilistic state in which the probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time shortening control.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a game state different from a specific state such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when a system reset is performed). The same control as (the state in which the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on) is performed. On the other hand, the time saving state is when one of the conditions of the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result being a "big hit" is satisfied first. Then, just finish. In addition, in the probabilistic state, in each special figure game and variable display of decorative symbols, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and is further controlled to the big hit game state is higher than in the normal state and the time saving state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" or a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of the special figure game is executed.

The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot game state ends is also referred to as "probability variation jackpot". The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the time saving state without being controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot game state ends is also referred to as "non-probability variation jackpot".

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal", and control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "per normal". The second start condition is to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of being established. In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, which is advantageous for the player, is also called high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the big hit game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. The state in which the high opening control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state in which the high opening control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is used. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of any of the special figure games using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which fluctuations continue, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R, etc.) are preliminarily used. When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric characters of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while forming all or part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (directed image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back a moving image different from the decorative pattern, and changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a change in the display mode of the character image, a display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called "reach effect display" (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are brought into the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode. As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, in each reach mode, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are preset. Then, when the reach mode of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the reach mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the symbol, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "pseudo-ream" and "slip" can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to the determination of the fluctuation pattern on the main board 9011 side. Whether or not it is decided.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decoration is different from the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream" or "slip", for example, displaying an effect image such as a predetermined character image or a message image. Notify the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state and that the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to an effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect for doing so may be executed.

When the special symbol that is the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and is predetermined. The fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination of is sometimes displayed as a stop. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "reachless loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

When the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach loss combination”) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". The fixed decoration symbol that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decoration symbol that is a reach loss combination are also collectively referred to as a fixed decoration symbol that is a loss combination (non-specific combination).

When the special symbol that is the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. Later, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed.
Here, as for the fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 905 is "1". Any one of the decorative symbols from "8" is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Anything is fine.

In addition, after the decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the look-ahead that announces and notifies that the reserved data whose special symbol display result is "big hit" is stored during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state. The advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, the game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) to adjust the left game area 9010A. It is possible to switch between a left-handed hit that shoots a game ball toward the right side and a right-handed shot that shoots a game ball toward the right game area 9010B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A (when the game ball enters the left game area 9010A), the right game area is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game ball wins the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is fired at 9010B. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is longer than when the game state is the probability change state and the time reduction state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". Since the probability of becoming a player is low, the rate at which a game ball launched into the left game area 9010A in the normal state wins the second start winning opening is extremely low as compared with the rate at which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening. There is.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game ball is launched into the right game area 9010B (when the game ball enters the right game area 9010B), the left is due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the game area 9010A, the rate at which the game ball wins in the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win in the first starting winning opening. There is. Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is left-handed in the normal state. Occasionally, the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is extremely low. Therefore, the player will hit left in the normal state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B passing through the second passage gate 9041B is such that the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A is the first due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 9041A. The rate at which the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B wins the second start winning opening in the open state is the game fired in the left game area 9010A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second starting winning opening in the open state.

Then, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol" is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting right in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is left in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when the ball is hit. Therefore, the player strikes right in the probabilistic state and the time saving state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B to the large winning opening in the open state is that the game ball fired in the left game area 9010A is determined by the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of winning a prize in the open large prize opening. Therefore, the player will hit right in the jackpot game state. In this way, the player strikes left in the normal state, switches to right-handed when the jackpot game state occurs, continues right-handed in the probabilistic state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the probabilistic state or the time saving state without the big hit game state), it will return to left-handed.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched in the left game area 9010A to the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left game area 9010A is the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050A. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050B is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B is the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050A. It is higher than the rate of winning 9050B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B to the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D provided in the right game area 9010B is the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050D is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A is the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050C. It is higher than the rate of winning 9050D.

For some or all of the plurality of general winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A and second general winning opening 9050B) provided in the left game area 9010A, only the game balls launched into the left game area 9010A It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B may not win a prize, and a plurality of general prize openings (third general prize opening 9050C and fourth general prize opening) provided in the right game area 9010B may be provided. For a part or all of 9050D), only the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B can win a prize, and the game ball fired in the left game area 9010C may not win a prize.

In this way, since left-handed hitting is performed in the normal state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B among the four general winning openings, and the big hit gaming state and In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, right-handed hitting is performed, so that there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D among the four general winning openings. As the game area in which the game ball is launched changes according to the game state and the like, the general winning opening where the game ball is likely to win also changes. In the left game area 9010A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability change state, and the time saving state. In the area 9010B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win (or vice versa), so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening may change depending on the game state.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a voice lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 47. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is composed of a ball payout device (not shown) or the like in response to reception of a prize ball number command (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 9011) in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set. The payout mechanism (the mechanism for paying out the prize balls) is driven to execute the payout of the prize balls.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special drawing game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a control function. On the main board 9011, for example, from the game control microcomputer 90100, the switch circuit 90110 that takes in the detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and the game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9027 and 9028 is mounted.

Further, the switch circuit 90110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 (details will be described later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 90100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is for detecting an abnormality generated in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives an image display device 905, speakers 908L, and 908R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 produces effects such as display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 909 and the like. It is equipped with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined effect operation to be performed on the electric component for use.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The audio lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is lit on the game effect lamp 909 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lights off.

As shown in FIG. 47, the main board 9011 has a first gate switch 9021A, a second gate switch 9021B, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general winning port switch 9024A. , The wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D is connected.

The first gate switch 9021A, the second gate switch 9021B, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D are, for example, Any configuration such as a so-called "sensor" that can detect a game ball as a game medium may be used. Further, on the main board 9011, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold display 9025A, the second hold display 9025B, and the normal figure hold display 9025C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. Further, a wiring for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is connected to the main board 9011.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The main board 9011 is provided with, for example, a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 90100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, and blocks the input of the signal from the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the side of the effect control board 9012 or the relay board 9015 to the side of the main board 9011.

The relay board 9015 may be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit has a diode in which the anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 9011 and the cathode is connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 9012, and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode. The other end is composed of a resistor connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulation circuit can block the input of the signal from the effect control board 9012 to the relay board 9015, and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the effect control board 9012 side to the main board 9011 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulation circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal on the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 90100 and the main board side connector on the main board 9011. By providing the above, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 9011 from the outside.

The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It includes lamp control commands used to control lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

Such effect control commands include, for example, a game state specification command that specifies a game state (normal state, probability change state, or time saving state), a variation start command that specifies a variation start in a special figure game, and a special in a special figure game. A variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation time of a symbol or a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol on the image display device 905, a variable display result notification command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol on the image display device 905. A decorative symbol stop command that specifies the stop of the variable display of, a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start and end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot end designation command, and a game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The start winning command that is output when, the general winning opening designation command that is output when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the large winning opening winning command that is output when the game ball wins in the large winning opening, etc. included.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a game control program and performs a control operation, and an update of numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 90103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

In this way, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform the game control. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90100 (or the CPU 90103) executes the game control microcomputer 90100 (or the CPU 90103). Or, the processing is performed), specifically, the CPU 90103 executes the control according to the program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on a substrate different from the main substrate 9011.

As shown in FIG. 47, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. The circuit 90124 and the I / O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, a variable data writing operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variable data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and an effect control CPU 90120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 9013. A wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the voice lamp control board 9014, a wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 901000, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation action of the player with respect to the operation button 9030 has been detected is transmitted from a push detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, the effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 9031 described later, and the operation in the display changeover switch 9032 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the unit (first position or second position) is also connected.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 includes an image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R, light emitters such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, an operation button 9030, a movable accessory 901000, and a production accessory. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance in order to control the effect operation using the effect device (electric component for effect) including the movable member and the like.

The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 47 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 90123 is for executing various effect displays such as variable display of decorative patterns and effect display in reach effect by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. To control. The display control unit 90123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 confirms the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode changeover switch 9031. Includes an input port for capturing various signals such as a enable signal and a signal for confirming the state of the display changeover switch 9032, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command (effect sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 9013, and a voice lamp control board 9014 are transmitted. A command (illumination signal) or the like is output, and a command (drive signal) or the like transmitted to the movable accessory 901000 is output.

The voice control board 9013 is equipped with, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like. As an example, in the voice control board 9013, the sound number data shown in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voices and sound effects according to the phone number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 908L and 908R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The stored data in the voice data ROM may be composed of data showing the output mode of voice and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the audio lamp control board 9014. As an example, in the audio lamp control board 9014, the illumination signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 909 or the like.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the generated abnormality is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 908L and 908R via the voice control board 9013, or the voice lamp control board 9014. The lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, etc. is controlled via the light to notify the player by light, or an abnormality notification image (error message) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123. Is displayed to notify the user. Examples of the abnormality include a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, which are detected by using the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 or the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is composed of one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is not limited to the sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be composed of those for detecting an abnormality. One or more sensors and the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 9026 are prepared according to each type of abnormality. The specific content of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be determined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like. Abnormalities that occur in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are phenomena that do not occur or are extremely unlikely to occur in normal games performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, magnetic abnormalities and vibration abnormalities that occur when there is an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 901. And phenomena such as abnormal radio waves) and phenomena that can hinder the progress of games, and in particular, phenomena that require notification to players and employees of game halls (pachinko shops, etc.).

Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.). For example, these sensors and the like may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. A known method can be appropriately used to detect the abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 90100 detects a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, etc. based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, an abnormality detection designation command for specifying that an abnormality has occurred is a main board. It is transmitted from 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the abnormality has occurred due to the display of the error message on the image display device 905, the output of the warning sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, the light emission mode when the abnormality occurs on the game effect lamp 909, and the like. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality occurs, as shown in FIG. 88 (f), an image of the characters "An error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

Here, not only an abnormality has occurred due to a notification means such as an image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R, and a game effect lamp 909, but also any type of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and opening of the front door. It may be possible to notify identifiable whether or not an abnormality has been detected.

The magnetic anomaly notification is an abnormality notification performed when a magnetic anomaly (an abnormality that a magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 901, in this case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. There is a fraudulent act of moving the game medium by a magnet to make a prize in the winning opening, or clogging a predetermined area with the game medium in order to guide the game medium to the winning opening. By notifying the magnetic anomaly, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided. The CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of a magnetic anomaly by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor exhibits a magnetic force equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (indicating a magnetic force → having a magnetic anomaly). When a magnetic anomaly is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the magnetic anomaly has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the magnetic anomaly. For example, an image with the characters "A magnetic error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, notification of an abnormality that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a special variable winning ball device 907 or the like. There is a fraudulent act of intentionally shaking the pachinko gaming machine to change the flow direction of the game medium toward the winning opening such as the big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from being performed. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality (vibration abnormality) due to vibration by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (stronger than a predetermined threshold value). Indicates vibration → There is vibration abnormality). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the vibration abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A vibration error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

The radio wave abnormality notification is a notification of an abnormality performed when a radio wave abnormality (an abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 901, in this case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. By irradiating the start port switch (1st start port switch 9022A and 2nd start port switch 9022B), count switch 9023, etc. with radio waves, these switches can be switched on / off to illegally generate a prize and win a prize ball. There is cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.) is provided. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of the predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the radio wave abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A radio wave error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

Both the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and are provided outside the game area of the game board 902. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 configured by the DIP switch switch the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of the slide type, the knob positions are set to one end side and the other end side. By switching to the side), the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 90120 can be switched. When the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 903, the glass door frame 903a covers the front surface of the game board 902, so that the player cannot operate the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032. It has become. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 903a when the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 903 (the state shown in FIG. 46). It is not shown in FIG. 46 because it is installed in an invisible position.

As described above, the clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the keyhole 9061, opens the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the game machine frame 903. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 provided on the game board 902 can be operated (dIP switch changeover). Then, when the operations of the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are completed, the glass door frame 903a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and the key is inserted into the keyhole 9061 to lock the device (shown in the figure). ) Is closed.

When the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is in the High state. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 provides information for the player (for example, a demonstration). It is specified that the game mode is to display the screen, etc.), and the information of the winning number management table, which will be described later, is not displayed on the image display device 905. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, that is, the information for the clerk in the image display device 905 (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying the number of winnings to each winning opening, and the information of the winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 905.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is in the High state. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 is informed of the number of winnings in the general winning opening. By specifying that the display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display the information based on the display control table (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 905, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 wins a prize in the general winning opening. It is specified that the permission to display the number is given, and the information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is permitted to be displayed on the image display device 905. do.

In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are provided on the front side (the surface facing the player) of the game board 902, but the mode changeover switch 9031 and / or the display changeover switch 9032 is used. , May be provided on the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 902. In such a configuration, the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 903 is used to rotate the gaming board 902 forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, so that the gaming board 902 is placed on the back side of the gaming board 902. The provided mode changeover switch 9031 and / or display changeover switch 9032 can be operated.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a start winning command as described above. The start winning command includes a start winning opening designation command indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has been generated, and the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. There is a start winning judgment result designation command and the like indicating a big hit judgment result and a big hit type judgment result at the time of winning a game ball.

The CPU 90103 determines the effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a prize is detected, a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are used as the first random number in the random number storage area for the first special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the first number of reserved storages after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "first starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Judgment of whether or not to start Performs the judgment at the time of winning.

In this start winning judgment, if the big hit judgment random number does not match the big hit judgment value in the big hit judgment table, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, as a start winning judgment result specification command, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and the start winning determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening (that is, according to the first starting winning opening) in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "first start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 determines the effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a prize is detected, a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are stored in a second random number storage area for a second special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the number of second reserved storages after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "second starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Judgment of whether or not to start Performs the judgment at the time of winning.

In this start winning judgment, if the big hit judgment random number does not match the big hit judgment value in the big hit judgment table, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value in the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, as a start winning judgment result specification command, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (that is, according to the second starting winning opening) in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "second start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

In this embodiment, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and based on the determination result. Although the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the variation pattern of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of the start winning, not limited to such a form. The look-ahead notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a non-reach fluctuation pattern. It is good to do it.

Specifically, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot determination. Along with the random number and the random number for determining the jackpot type, the random number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. Further, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a fluctuation pattern as a random number for determining a big hit and a big hit. Together with the random number for type determination, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the second special figure.

Here, the ROM 90101 corresponds to each of the deviation pattern determination table in which the random number range corresponding to each of the deviation fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 53 (A) is set and the jackpot fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 53 (B). A variable pattern determination table for jackpots in which the random number range is set is stored.

When the determination result of the start winning determination (display result specified by the start winning determination result specification command) is "out of place", the CPU 90103 refers to the out-of-order variation pattern determination table and extracts (stores) it. The variation pattern determination random number is included in the random number range of which variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is specified, and the specified variation pattern is "non-reach out". , "Normal reach out" or "Super reach out", set the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command to specify which of the variation patterns.

On the other hand, the CPU 90103 changes for big hits when the judgment result of the start winning judgment (display result specified by the start winning judgment result specification command) is either "non-probability change big hit" or "probability change big hit". With reference to the pattern determination table, it is determined which variation pattern random number range includes the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination random number, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is specified. Then, a command for specifying a variation pattern at the time of starting winning, which specifies whether the specified variation pattern is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot", is set.

When the CPU 90103 detects an invalid start winning, the CPU 90103 sets blank data for designating that it is not a valid start winning as a command for specifying a variation pattern determination result at the time of starting winning.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set start winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 9012 as a start winning command together with the start winning opening designation command and the start winning determination result designation command described above.

The effect control CPU 90120 includes a start winning opening designation command designated as the "first start winning opening" and a start winning determination result specification command including valid data that is not blank data (as well as starting including valid data that is not blank data). When the winning variation pattern determination result specification command) is received, the start winning determination result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specification command) is first held in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored data (the first reserved stored number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and the start winning slot designation command designated as the "second starting winning slot" and valid data that is not blank data are stored. When a start winning judgment result specification command including (and a start winning variation pattern determination result specification command including valid data other than blank data) is received, the start winning determination result specification command (and start winning variation pattern determination) is received. The result designation command) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. The effect control CPU 90120 confirms the start winning determination result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area, so that the first special feature is set before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the look-ahead notice effect.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening designation command designated as the "first starting winning opening" and a starting winning determination result specification command including blank data (as well as a starting winning variation pattern determination result specification command including blank data). Is received, it is specified that an invalid start winning is generated in the first start winning opening, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) is used for the first special figure. It is possible to store the winning history to the first starting winning opening in the winning history storage area, which will be described later, without storing it in the starting winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the look-ahead notice effect). When the start winning opening designation command designated by "start winning opening" and the starting winning judgment result specification command including blank data (and the starting winning variation pattern judgment result specification command including blank data) are received, the second start winning opening is entered. By identifying that an invalid start winning has occurred, the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (look-ahead). (Excluded from the execution target of the advance notice effect), it is possible to store the winning history in the second starting winning opening in the winning history storage area described later.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a variation pattern designation command as described above. As shown below, when the main board 9011 starts the variable display of the special symbol, the main board 9011 determines the fluctuation pattern according to the special symbol display result to be derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 9012 of the fluctuation pattern. Output the fluctuation pattern specification command to specify. The effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern is stored in advance in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012, and the effect control CPU 90120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command. Data is selected, and the effect control is executed according to the selected effect control data.

When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the CPU 90103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, among the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random numbers for determining the jackpot and the random numbers for determining the jackpot type in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of stored storage = 1), and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent random numbers are read. The jackpot determination random number, the jackpot type determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

In this start determination, if the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command that specifies "missing", and together with the jackpot determination random number. It is determined which variation pattern random number set in the deviation pattern determination table includes the variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area, and the variation pattern determination random number corresponds to the random number. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the read big hit type judgment random number is further stored in the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is judged which of the judgment values is matched. Then, a variable display result notification command that specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the big hit judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern judgment read from the head storage area are changed for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs a set variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command for designating the determined variable pattern, together with the variable start command for designating the variable start of the first special figure.

When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the CPU 90103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure. In addition, among the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random numbers for determining the jackpot and the random numbers for determining the jackpot type in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of stored storage = 1), and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent random numbers are read. The jackpot determination random number, the jackpot type determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

In this start determination, if the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command that specifies "missing", and together with the jackpot determination random number. It is determined which variation pattern random number set in the deviation pattern determination table includes the variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area, and the variation pattern determination random number corresponds to the random number. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the read big hit type judgment random number is further stored in the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is judged which of the judgment values is matched. Then, a variable display result notification command that specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the big hit judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern judgment read from the head storage area are changed for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs a set variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command for designating the determined variable pattern, together with the variable start command for designating the variable start of the second special figure.

When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command for specifying the variation start of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result specification commands (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure, the first storage area (reserved storage number). The start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) of the storage area corresponding to = 1 is deleted, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning) of the storage area after that is deleted. The time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the ROM 90121, and decorates the ROM 90121 so that the reach state is established at the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. Controls the variable display of symbols. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern.

When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command for specifying the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result specification commands (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure, the first storage area (reserved storage number). The start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) of the storage area corresponding to = 1 is deleted, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning) of the storage area after that is deleted. The time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

Further, when the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D detects that the game ball has won in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the game ball is detected in any of the general winning openings. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not a prize has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. That is, when a game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, a general winning opening designation command for designating a prize to the first general winning opening 9050A is output, and the game ball is released by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. When detected, a general winning opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general winning opening 9050B is output, and when a game ball is detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C, the third general winning opening 9050C is entered. A general winning opening designation command for specifying a prize is output, and when a game ball is detected by the 4th general winning opening switch 9024D, a general winning opening designation command for specifying a prize for the 4th general winning opening 9050D is output. ..

Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can identify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and which general winning opening the game ball has won based on the received general winning opening designation command. .. Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies which starting winning opening the game ball has won. It is designed to receive mouth specification commands. As a result, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the information that can identify the general winning opening where the winning has occurred and the information that can identify the starting winning opening where the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 according to the order in which the winning is generated. It is possible.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the general winning opening (general winning opening won by the game ball) designated by the received general winning opening designation command. Confirm and confirm whether the starting winning opening (starting winning opening won by the game ball) specified by the received start winning opening designation command is either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , Each general winning opening and each starting winning opening are stored in the RAM 90122. For example, if the game ball wins in the order of the 2nd general winning opening 9050B, the 1st starting winning opening, the 1st general winning opening 9050A, the 2nd starting winning opening, and the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, [2nd general winning opening] The history of the winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122.

Further, when the winning of the starting winning opening and the winning of the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 issues a starting winning opening designation command and a starting winning determination result designation command. , The general winning opening designation command may be prioritized and sent first. For example, detection by any of the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B and by any of the first general prize opening switch 9024A to the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D. When the detection is confirmed almost at the same time (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 issues a start winning opening designation command and a starting winning decision result designation command with a general winning slot designation command. It is better to give priority to sending first. By adopting such a transmission order, it is understood that the effect control CPU 90120 has already received the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning determination result designation command when the general winning opening designation command is received. It is possible, and as a specific effect to be executed based on the winning of the general winning opening, it is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the previously received start winning determination result designation command.

If the general winning opening is won more than once within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 shall transmit a plurality of general winning opening designation commands according to a predetermined priority. do. For example, when the detection by the first general winning opening switch 9024A and the detection by the second general winning opening switch 9024B are confirmed almost at the same time (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 , The general winning opening designation command for specifying the winning to the general winning opening, which is more difficult to win, may be sent first with priority. In addition, if the number of prize balls to be given differs depending on the general winning opening, even if the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the general winning opening with a larger number of winning balls is given priority and sent first. good.

Further, when the count switch 9023 detects that the game ball has won the big prize opening, the big winning opening winning command that specifies that the game ball has won the big winning opening is issued from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. Is output to. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening based on the received large winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above can be specified. Similar to the history, it is possible to store the winning history to the large winning opening in the winning history storage area.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a big hit start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state and a jackpot end designation command for designating the end of the jackpot game state. It is possible to distinguish and total the number of times the command is received and the number of times the general winning opening designation command is received. As a result, the number of winnings to the big winning opening and the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the period controlled by the big hit game state can be separately totaled, and the totaling result can be totaled as shown in FIG. 52. It is also possible to display it on the 905.

Further, when the game ball is launched in the game area 9010, the game ball usually wins a prize in any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening at a certain frequency. If the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed and the game ball has not won a prize in any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), the game is played. There is a high possibility that the person is in a non-gaming state in which the player is not playing a game. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to determine the end of the game, which determines that the game has ended.

FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an example of the winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 90122. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored.
The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening for each gaming state based on the jackpot start designation command, the jackpot end designation command, the game state designation command, and the general winning opening designation command. .. The game state specification command specifies the timing at which the game state changes (the game state specification command in this case specifies the controlled game state, and is transmitted, for example, at the end of the jackpot game state or the end of the time saving state. ) Or, it is transmitted at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the game state specification command in this case specifies the game state when the special symbol game is executed).

In this example, the number of prizes to the second general prize opening 9050B is 50 (total for the entire period), of which the number of prizes in the normal state is 46, the number of prizes in the jackpot game state is 2, and the number of prizes in the probability change state. Is 1, and the number of prizes in the time saving state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. In addition, the total number of prizes to the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 is the number of prizes in the left-handed period and 27 is the number of prizes in the right-handed period.

In this way, the number of winnings in each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored and displayed on the image display device 905 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901). It is transmitted to a game device such as a card unit or a call lamp device and displayed on a display device provided in the game device, or is transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device provided in the information management device. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball into each general winning opening in the game hall and use it for the maintenance of the game nail.
For example, if the number of winnings of a game ball to a general winning opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail in the vicinity of the general winning opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

Winning number information of the winning number management table (the number of winnings to each general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in each game state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the left-handed period and the right-handing period, to the general winning opening (Including the total number of winnings) is displayed on the image display device 905 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (in the case of maintenance mode), and is displayed in the case of the first position (in the case of the game mode). Do not show. The clerk at the amusement park switches the mode changeover switch 9031 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information in the winning number management table, and uses this as a reference to perform maintenance on the game nails and to the general winning opening. Make the winning frequency of game balls appropriate. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode changeover switch 9031 is returned from the second position to the first position.

In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state), and the execution status of the special figure game (special symbol). Whether or not the variable display is executed, the number of reserved memories of the special figure game), and the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game) Regardless of this, the period during which the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position is continuously displayed on the image display device 905. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the game state. For example, the mode changeover switch 9031 may be displayed. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the time saving state, and the jackpot game state. It may be.

Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. Even if the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the special symbol game can be displayed only during the period of 0, and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. , The period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed or the period during which the number of reserved storages of the special symbol game is not 0 may not be displayed. Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the normal drawing game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed and the reserved memory number of the normal figure game can be displayed only during the period of 0, and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. , The period during which the variable display of the normal symbol is executed or the period during which the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol game is not 0 may not be displayed.

The prize number information stored in the prize number management table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation buttons 9030 (settings of FIGS. 50 (1) to (3)). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen). Further, the prize number information stored in the prize number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the business of the game hall is closed. Then, the information on the number of winnings for each gaming machine is stored in the gaming information management device for each business day. In addition, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted (reset) based on the execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area described above in the winning history storage area. Even if it is not erased, the operation button is not deleted, and after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, or in the state where the clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905). It is erased by the operation of 9030).

For example, the clerk of the amusement park determines the operation button 9030 in the state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 (the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (display setting) state). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the winning number management table (the number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total number of winnings of general winning openings) can be reset to 0. It is possible.

FIG. 48B is a diagram showing an example of prize number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 90122. In this display control table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored.
The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of winnings to the general winning opening is 11, of which the number of winnings to the first general winning opening 9050A is 3, the number of winnings to the second general winning opening 9050B is 5, and the number of winnings to the third general winning opening is 5. The number of prizes for the 9050C is 2, and the number of prizes for the 4th general prize opening 9050D is 1.

As shown in FIG. 49, the information on the number of winnings in the display control table (specifically, the number of objects displayed according to the total number of winnings) is displayed when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the display setting). Case), and when the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 9030, it is displayed on the image display device 905. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), the prize in the display control table is won regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general prize number is set by the operation button 9030. Numerical information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of the display setting), when the display setting of the general prize number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of the non-display setting). Does not display the winning number information in the display control table.

That is, when the clerk of the amusement park sets the display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. There is. Only when the clerk of the game hall sets the display permission of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect) based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed. Regarding the effect, as shown in FIG. 49, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (when the execution permission is set), and the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution of the specific effect). It can be executed when the setting) has been performed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (when the execution is not permitted), it depends on whether or not the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution setting of the specific effect). However, the specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (when the execution permission is set), the display setting of the general prize number is not set by the operation button 9030 (when the non-execution setting is set). No specific effect is executed.

That is, when the clerk of the game hall sets the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the execution setting operation of the player. Only when the clerk of the game hall sets the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect can be executed according to the execution setting operation of the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Amusement place side: display changeover switch 9032, player side: operation button 9030). Not limited to such a form, it may be possible to individually set whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening and whether or not a specific effect can be executed, and it is set by different operation means. You may.

The winning number information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation buttons 9030 (settings of FIGS. 50 (1) to (3)). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen). In addition, the winning number information (the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings) stored in the display control table is such that the winning history of the above-mentioned winning history storage area corresponds to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the effect (A or B), it is not deleted, and when the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. It is deleted (reset to 0) when the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute).

When the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to 0. For example, on the screen of FIG. 51, which will be described later, the coin-shaped object (winning-corresponding display) displayed on the right side of the characters of "general winning" is no longer displayed, and the number of displayed objects becomes 0. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are determined to end the game. If it is reset to 0 based on, then, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of prizes) will be displayed.

Further, the clerk or the player of the game hall presses the operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905 (a state in which an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the total number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total winning of the general winning opening) regardless of the game end determination. The number) can be reset to 0, and the winning number information displayed on the image display device 905 is also reset to 0 (all the displayed objects are deleted).

As shown in FIG. 50, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 9030 during the display of the demo screen which is not related to the progress of the special figure game and the progress of the normal figure game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1). The demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, and the screen of FIG. 50 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is being displayed.

On the screen of FIG. 50 (1), the message "Please press the enter button for the display setting of the general prize number" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed below it, and the operation button 9030 is pressed. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 9030 according to the instruction, the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon containing the characters "display" and an icon containing the characters "do not display" are displayed, and the message "Enter button after selecting with the jog dial" is displayed, and the operation button 9030 ( An arrow prompting you to press the jog dial) after rotating it is displayed.

To display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left to select the icon containing the characters "display" and enter the general winning opening. To prevent the number of winnings from being displayed, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right to select an icon containing the characters "not displayed". In this example, the icon containing the word "display" is selected.

Then, when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "display" selected in FIG. 50 (2), as shown in FIG. 50 (3), "the number of general prizes is displayed." A message is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. 50 (4). By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 51) stored in the display control table at the time of completing the setting operation is immediately displayed. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 905 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may do so.

On the other hand, if the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "not displayed" selected in FIG. 50 (2), the message "The number of general prizes will not be displayed" is displayed, and FIG. 50 (4) Return to the normal demo screen. By this setting operation, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905.

Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, on the playground side, the winning number information stored in the display control table is transmitted to the image display device 905. The image display device 905 has a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening as shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) only when the display is permitted. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 905 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table. As shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3), the screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 9032 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Will be done.

In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) on the playground side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the amusement park is prioritized over the intention of the player. Therefore, if the player does not want the player to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 may be set to the first position (non-display position).

Further, when the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player, even though the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side ( Although it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening regardless of the setting on the player side), on the player side as shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3). If the setting screen is displayed, it will be misunderstood that the player will be able to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her own setting operation.

In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (generally regardless of the setting on the player side). When it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that "the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player side" is not performed.

Display settings on the amusement park side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is the second position) and display settings on the player side (on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2), an icon including the characters "display" is displayed. When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. 51 (1), at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 905. The words "general prize" are displayed. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D), as shown in FIG. 51 (2), a coin-shaped object is to the right of the character "general winning opening". (Winning correspondence display) is displayed.

The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 905 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 51 (3), each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is added by 1. As a result, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. In addition, the coin-shaped object contains the number "10", which indicates the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a prize in the general prize opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening. The number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a prize in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in ROM 90121 in advance. And.

In this way, by displaying the objects corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and increasing the number of objects to be displayed as the number of winnings increases, the player can use the general winning opening. It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won a prize and the number of game balls won in the general winning opening.

When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, as described above, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings of the game balls to each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0. As a result, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), all the coin-shaped objects displayed on the right side of the characters of "general prize" are deleted. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is 0.

In this way, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state, the number of winnings to the notified general winning opening is reset to 0 (general). By displaying that there is no winning in the winning opening), it is possible to prevent the player who subsequently plays the game with the gaming machine from knowing the number of winnings in the general winning opening. ..

In this embodiment, by setting the condition for determining the end of the game and the condition for shifting to the demo screen described above as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening notified at the time of transition to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset to. In this way, when the demo screen is displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified may be reset to 0.

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general prizes on the player setting screen (FIG. 50), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each prize in the general prize opening shown in FIG. 51 is not executed. .. In these cases, the characters "general winning number" shown in FIG. 51 are not displayed, and the coin-shaped object itself is also displayed regardless of the number of winnings in the general winning opening (total winning number in the display control table). Do not show.

If the number of objects (normal objects) displayed for each prize in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so that the number of normal objects has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a mode different from that of the normal object including the number "100") instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. As a result, it is possible to notify the predetermined number of winning times and the corresponding number of prize balls in the display area of one special object without requiring the display area of a predetermined number of normal objects.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the displayed objects increase by 1 for each winning in the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a plurality of objects in the general winning opening are used. The object may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the displayed object may be incremented by 1 for every 5 winnings in the general winning opening.

In addition, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2)). When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon selected), as shown in FIG. 52, the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled. In, the number of winnings to the general winning opening will be displayed together with the number of winnings to the large winning opening.

FIG. 52 (1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 905 when the jackpot game state is controlled. When the first round game is started, the characters "general winning number" are displayed, and on the right side, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the "large winning number" is displayed. Character is displayed, and the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed on the right side. In this example, the number of winning balls to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. In addition, the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big hit game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the big winning opening is 15, so that it is displayed as [0 × 15]. Has been done. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [0 × 10] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big winning opening [0 × 15]. Since the total number of and is 0, it is displayed as [total 0 balls].

As shown in FIG. 52 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball wins seven times in the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A). -The number of general prizes has been updated to 1 and the number of large prizes has been updated to 7 because the game ball has won a prize once in the 4th general prize opening 9050D). In addition, the total number of prize balls [1 × 10] given according to the winning of the general winning opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] given according to the winning of the large winning opening is 115. Therefore, it is displayed as [115 balls in total]. The number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [1 x 10 = 10 balls] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the large winning opening [7 x 15 = 105 balls] And may be displayed individually.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), as a result of performing the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are totaled in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907) in the big hit game state. After winning 105 times, the number of general prizes became 3 and the number of large prizes was updated to 105 because the game balls won a total of 3 times in the general prize openings (1st general prize opening 9050A to 4th general prize opening 9050D). ing. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [3 × 10] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big winning opening [105 × 15]. Since the total number of and is 1605, it is displayed as [1605 balls in total].

In this way, by displaying the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state separately from the number of winnings to the big winning opening, the player can only display the number of winnings to the big winning opening. In addition, we will be interested in the number of prizes in the general prize opening. In addition, by displaying the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes in the large prize opening and the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes in the general prize opening separately, the player can win the prize in the large prize opening. You will be interested not only in the number of prize balls given according to the number of prize balls, but also in the number of prize balls given according to the prizes in the general winning openings.

It should be noted that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state may be displayed on the image display device 905, not limited to the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot game state. The number of winnings to the general winning opening in the normal state may be displayed on the image display device 905. Further, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit game state, probable change state or time saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state) may be displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 905. Further, the image display device 905 may display the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved storages of the special symbol game).

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 50), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 52 is displayed. Display control is not executed. In these cases, the character "general prize number" itself shown in FIG. 52 is not displayed, and the number of prizes to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding thereto during the period controlled by the jackpot game state. , And the total number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winnings to the large winning opening are not displayed. Only the number of prizes to the large prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 51, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described, but the image display device 905 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls given according to the winning in the general winning opening are displayed has been described. These may not be displayed on the device 905.

In this way, it is possible to display only the number of prize balls to the general winning opening and not to display the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of prize balls given according to the winning to the general winning opening. .. With such a configuration, when the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning openings is changed in the design process of the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 905 must be changed according to the change. It is possible to prevent the situation of disappearing. On the contrary, only the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening may be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player settings shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are set. An example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display) has been described, but the display changeover switch 9032 is not limited to this form. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screens shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are displayed (the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display). (Notify the player that this is the case).

In such a configuration, even if the player is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3), even if the player is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. The effect control CPU 90120 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the playground side. Do not (priority is given to the playground setting). At this time, the image display device 905 may display that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the playground setting.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. 50 (1) is displayed (display / non-display switching of the number of winnings is possible). This is notified to the player), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even when the operation button 9030 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 50 (1), the screen does not move to the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2), and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed. It may not be possible to select whether or not.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game field setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the game field setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are displayed. When the operation button 9030 is pressed while the icon including the characters "display" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device. If the operation button 9030 is pressed while the icon displayed on 905 (display control of FIGS. 51 and 52 is executed) and the icon including the character "not displayed" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2), a general prize is awarded. The number of winnings in the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 905 (the display control of FIGS. 51 and 52 is not executed).

Further, the playground setting and the player setting may be given the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening according to the order of the received setting operations. That is, it may be decided whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the general winning opening is subsequently won on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3). When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIGS. 51 and 52 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are set so that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the second position. When (display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIGS. 51 and 52 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3). When is set not to display, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (display control of FIGS. 51 and 52 is not executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the first position. When (non-display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (display control of FIGS. 51 and 52 is not executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the clerk of the amusement park can operate the display changeover switch 9032 to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905, and the player. By operating the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905, but the display is not limited to this form, and the clerk at the amusement park switches the display. By operating the switch 9032, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of prizes to the general winning opening on the image display device 905, while on the player side, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905. It may not be possible to set whether or not to display (for example, the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) is not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 only on the amusement park side.

On the contrary, by operating the operation button 9030, the player (and the clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905. On the other hand, it is possible that only the amusement park side does not provide a means for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided). In such a configuration, whether or not the player and the clerk of the game hall display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). It can be set. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the amusement park to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905, but the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is pachinko. Information is displayed by being transmitted to an information display device provided corresponding to the game machine 901, for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 901 or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko game machine 901. It may be displayed on the device. Further, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the general winning opening for each game machine is transmitted in the information management device. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, as a configuration in which the mode changeover switch 9031 is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 905), and the information display device or the information display device It may be displayed only in the information management device.

In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 by setting the mode changeover switch 9031, and is stored in the display control table by setting the display changeover switch 9032. An example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 905 has been described. As described above, the winning number management table and the display control table are not provided with individual switches for display control. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the common switch as a display setting, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 905, and the common switch is used. By setting to hide, neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table may be displayed on the image display device 905.

In FIG. 53 (A), when a special symbol (missing symbol) other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol, it is determined by the main board 9011 (microcomputer 90100 for game control). The out-of-order fluctuation pattern is illustrated. Further, FIG. 53 (B) illustrates a jackpot variation pattern determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. Has been done. Since the special figure fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 that has received the variation pattern designation command can execute the effect according to the special figure variation time.

Among the out-of-reach fluctuation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are fluctuation patterns in which the non-reach out-of-reach effect mode is used, PX003 is a variation pattern in which the normal reach-out-of-reach effect mode is used, and PX004 is a super-reach out-of-reach effect mode. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the jackpot fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of a normal reach jackpot, and PY004 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of a super reach jackpot. Here, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

The battle production is a production that suggests whether or not a friendly character and an enemy character battle each other and win or lose a big hit. In PX004, which is a fluctuation pattern out of super reach, a defeat effect is executed in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character, whereas in PY004, which is a fluctuation pattern of super reach jackpot, a ally character wins over an enemy character. The production is executed.

As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern designation command when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 90100. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (before the stop display of the confirmed special symbol), a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol of the variable display (that is, the jackpot symbol). It is possible to execute a variable result advance notice effect for notifying that the game is to be controlled).

In the variation result advance notice effect shown in FIG. 54 (a), the variation announcement effect of the first aspect in which only the audio effect in which the voice "Now is a chance!" Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, and the audio effect are combined. It is possible to execute the variation notice effect of the second aspect in which the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 901000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the effect mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied).

The effect control CPU 90120 is based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: change result advance notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the variation result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the variation result notice effect is determined, and the determined mode is determined. The fluctuation result notice effect is executed at. As will be described later, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is not executed, the execution of the variation result advance notice effect is suspended or the variation result advance notice effect is performed. Do not execute.

For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies "off", the voice effect is produced at a rate of 80%. The variation notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the variation notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the variable display result (variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies "big hit", the voice effect is produced at a rate of 25%. The variation notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the variation notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 75%.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a starting winning prize when an effective starting winning entry is generated in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening in the game control microcomputer 90100. Receives the time judgment result specification command. As a result, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol of variable display that has not yet been executed before the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied (that is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state). ) Is available for pre-reading notice.

In the look-ahead notice effect shown in FIG. 54 (b), the first aspect of the look-ahead notice effect in which only the voice effect in which the voice "Chance is coming soon!" Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, and the movable combination is performed together with the voice effect. It is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect of the second aspect in which the accessory effect in which the object 901000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the effect mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. There is.

The effect control CPU 90120 reads ahead based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the advance notice production is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning to the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the look-ahead notice effect is determined, and the determined mode is used. A look-ahead notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is suspended or the look-ahead notice effect is not executed.

For example, when the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area does not include the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit" (all start winnings that specify "missing"). In the case of the time determination result specification command), the look-ahead advance notice effect of the first aspect accompanied only by the voice effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the look-ahead advance notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 15%. Perform a look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, if the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area includes the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit", the voice effect is produced at a rate of 10%. The look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a specific effect executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the variable result advance notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit symbol is executed as the specific effect A. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, that is, whether or not the hold memory includes the one judged as a big hit is carried out. It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is notified. When the setting is made (when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (execution permission setting), and the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution setting of the specific effect). Only when this is done), the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a specific effect.

As described above, each time the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening designation command, the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are separately provided, for example, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second. When a prize is generated in the order of the general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area Winning history corresponding to the specific effect B Winning history of [1st general winning opening, 2nd general winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 3rd general winning opening, 4th] Will be remembered.

In the effect mode in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (when a prize is generated in any of the winning openings). ), It is confirmed whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is decided based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. In addition, in the production mode in which only the specific production B can be executed, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific production B (at the timing when a prize is awarded to any of the winning openings), a prize is won. It is confirmed whether or not the conditions are satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning conditions are satisfied. Further, in the effect mode in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, each time the prize history is stored in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any one of them). (At the timing when a prize is awarded to the winning opening of The execution of the specific effect A is decided based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. , The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning conditions corresponding to the specific effect B are satisfied.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect A execution flag when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, the specific effect A according to the variable display result The mode (only the voice effect, or both the voice effect and the accessory effect) is determined, the variation result notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the variation result advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the target of the variation result notice effect does not exist, so the specific effect A is executed. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag is left set.
The effect control CPU 90120 can grasp that the specific effect A is determined to be executed by the specific effect A execution flag being set, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is satisfied, the mode of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, and the state is set to the pending state. The specific effect A that has been set is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

Not limited to such a form, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. The execution of the specific effect A may be stopped without any reason, and the specific effect A may not be executed even when the start condition of the variable display is subsequently satisfied.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect B execution flag when the execution of the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, when the number of reserved storages (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1 or more at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, 1 The mode of the specific effect B (only the voice effect or both the voice effect and the character effect) is determined according to the above-mentioned start winning judgment result, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect is performed. B Clear the execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the look-ahead notice effect.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, since the target of the pre-reading advance notice effect does not exist, the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. Make it a state. The effect control CPU 90120 can grasp that the specific effect B is determined to be executed by the specific effect B execution flag being set, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the starting condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more) due to the occurrence of a prize in the starting winning opening, the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the starting winning determination result. The specific effect B that has been in the hold state is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

Not limited to such a form, if the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and then the execution of the specific effect B is stopped. Even when the start condition is satisfied and the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

Further, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (for example, when a power failure is detected), the effect control CPU 90120 has a prize history storage area (a prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a prize history storage area). The winning history stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flag (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are all deleted. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 during the execution of the specific effect (variation result advance notice effect, look-ahead advance notice effect), or in a state where the specific effect has not yet been executed after the execution of the specific effect is decided. Is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, but the specific effect that was being executed or the specific effect that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, during a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased so that the specific effect is not executed. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions have been met based on the winning history since the power supply was started, a new specific effect is executed.

[First production form]
In the first effect mode shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning openings 9050D when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. Each time a prize is won, a prize condition (which is the first prize condition) is established. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which is the first winning condition). (Includes winning history for either) is deleted.

On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probability variation state or the time saving state, each time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which is the second winning condition). (Includes winning history for either) is deleted.

In the first effect form and the second effect form to the fourth effect form described later, (1) the ratio of the specific effect being executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening in the normal state is (2). ) It is higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the player is usually more interested in the winning status of the game ball in the second starting winning opening and the variable display of the decorative symbol than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Even if a specific effect is executed, it is difficult to create the same interest as in the normal state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the execution rate of the specific effect is lowered as compared with the normal state, and the deterioration of the interest of the specific effect is suppressed.

Note that, unlike the first effect mode, the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, do not determine whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect. In each of the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, a specific effect can be executed when the winning condition is satisfied. However, (2) the winning condition in the probabilistic state or the time saving state is (1) normal. More winnings are required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific effect in the probability variation state or the time saving state.

In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening. Contrary to the examples of the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (2) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state is (2). 1) In the normal state, the ratio may be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

In the second production form to the fourth production form, which will be described later, as in the first production form, when the winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect. You may do so. For example, in the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, the first prize condition required in the normal state and the second prize condition required in the probability variation state or the time saving state are the same prize conditions, and the first By differentiating the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the normal state and the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the probabilistic state or the time saving state as in the production form, the ratio at which the specific effect is normally executed and the probabilistic change The ratio at which the specific effect is executed in the state or the time saving state may be different.

Further, the specific effect may be executed at different ratios according to not only the game state but also the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than the case where the display result of the variable display is a missed symbol, and at the time of starting prize. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big hit at the time of starting prize (when there is only a hold memory determined to be a deviation at the time of starting prize), A specific effect may be executed at a high rate. Further, the number of times the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or the specific effect of a different type is classified by type. It may be possible to execute it only once each time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect mode shown in FIG. 55, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 is a general of two or more of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning openings 9050D. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins at least once in each winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variation state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 is used for two or more general winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, respectively. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

As described above, in the second effect form, and the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of prizes to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the probability change state or By different from the number of prizes to the general prize opening required to execute the specific effect in the time saving state, it is possible to make the number of prizes of the game ball to the general prize opening interesting according to the game state. ..

Further, in the second effect mode, in order to execute the specific effect, at least one game is played for each of two or more general prize openings out of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D. The condition is that the ball wins. In this way, by setting the winning for each of the plurality of general winning openings as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only whether or not there is a winning in the general winning opening, but also the game ball is won in any of the general winning openings. You can be interested in what you did.

In the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, the start of the jackpot game state is specified based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the jackpot start designation command, both the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the prize history in the prize history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the game state. .. Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history of the winning history storage area in the normal state, and the winning history is not necessarily limited to the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not always satisfied. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history of the winning history storage area in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the probable changing state or the time saving state is not necessarily satisfied. The second winning condition is not always satisfied based on the winning history of only the time saving state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probabilistic state or the time saving state to the normal state. May be good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. You may try to confirm.

[Third production form]
In the third effect mode shown in FIG. 55, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when the game ball has won a prize in the winning opening 9050D) three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 enters the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of 5 times or more. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history to the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). (Set). Then, if the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the timer for the specific effect A times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. .. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (if the winning condition is satisfied before the timer for the specific effect A times out), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is executed. Is erased.

In this way, the winning frequency (number of winnings within a predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the probabilistic state or the shortened time state. By different from the number of winnings in the game, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the frequency of winning according to the game state.

Further, in the third effect mode, when the specific effect A targeting the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in the predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only for the variable display period of 1). (When the winning conditions are met based on the winning history), a specific effect A that targets a variable display different from the variable display that was executed when winning the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed. In some cases (the winning condition is satisfied by the winning history in a plurality of variable display periods).

It should be noted that, as in the third effect mode, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times as a form in which the specific effect is executed when the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. A specific effect may be executed when the number of prizes to the general prize opening during a certain period reaches a predetermined number. For example, it is specified until all the reserved memories of the special figure game are exhausted, that is, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number within the period in which the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved memory number is executed. The production may be executed.

[Fourth production form]
In the fourth effect mode shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. , The starting prize opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), and the game ball wins in this order. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established by winning the prize in the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the game state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a starting winning opening (first starting). One of the winning openings and the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), and the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth). The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order to the general winning opening and other winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning opening is a specific order. By doing so, it is possible to be interested not only in the winning status of the general winning opening but also in the winning order of the general winning opening and other winning openings.

It should be noted that the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in the general winning opening and the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in the other winning openings may be set to have a range. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning the starting winning opening three times or more in a row and then winning the general winning opening two or more times in a row. In addition, which of the plurality of general winning openings has been won, or which of the plurality of other winning openings has been won may also be a winning condition. For example, the winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, and the second general winning opening 9050B. May be good. In addition, the order is not limited to the order in which the general winning opening is awarded after the starting winning opening is awarded, but the winning condition is that the starting winning opening is won after the general winning opening is won. May hold.

Further, the winning conditions may be satisfied based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls to the plurality of general winning openings is a specific order. For example, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is that the game ball wins a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. When the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning opening further The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) may be satisfied by the game ball winning a prize in a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D.

Further, the winning conditions may be satisfied based on the winning of the game balls to a plurality of general winning openings and the winning order of the game balls to one or a plurality of starting winning openings in a specific order. .. For example, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is that the game ball wins in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, and the second general winning opening 9050B. When the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, Further, even if the winning condition (the second winning condition) is satisfied by winning the game ball in the order of the third general winning opening 9050C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. good.

In addition, the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the starting winning opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the large winning opening. The conditions may be satisfied, and the winning conditions are satisfied based on the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the first passing gate 9041A or the second passing gate 9041B in a specific order. You may do so. In addition, when a specific area where the jackpot type (for example, probability variation jackpot) is determined based on the entry of the game ball is provided, the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

In addition, in the 1st effect mode to the 4th effect form, the example of executing the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) as the specific effect has been described, but the look-ahead advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. You may.

[Fifth production form to eighth production form]
In the fifth effect mode to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 56, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, there are (1) a normal state and (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. , The winning conditions are not different, and they are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first prize condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the prize condition adopted in the normal state is provided as a common prize condition, respectively. ing. Then, (1) when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the fluctuation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state, a pre-reading advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as a specific effect. As a result, the type of the specific effect can be changed according to the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening. You can improve your interest.

In the fifth effect mode shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. Then, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and the winning history of the winning history storage area, and The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) a probability change state or a time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is executed. , And the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state. Each time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. On the other hand, when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the specific effect A is supported. Both the winning history of the winning history storage area and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted.

In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. Is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. Further, in the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the game state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probabilistic state or the time saving state to the normal state. May be good.

In the seventh effect mode, the timer for the specific effect is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. .. Then, when the timer for the specific effect times out, neither the specific effect A nor the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are displayed. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied before the timeout of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. The winning history of the winning history storage area is deleted. (2) In the case of the probability change state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. The winning history of the winning history storage area of B is deleted.

[9th production form to 12th production form]
In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 57, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, there are (1) a normal state and (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. , The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state, the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. If is satisfied, the pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. As a result, the execution rate of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be different depending on the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific production performed based on the above.

In the ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 57, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B. Each time a prize is won, a prize condition (which is regarded as the first prize condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is decided at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, each time the game ball wins in either the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is decided at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the tenth effect mode shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 90120 has one in both the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. When the game ball wins more than once, the winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability variation state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more game balls in both the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied by winning the prize, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. Is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. Further, in the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the prize history in the prize history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the game state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probabilistic state or the time saving state to the normal state. May be good.

In the eleventh effect mode shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 90120 enters the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B within 120 seconds when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. When the game ball wins a prize three times or more in total, the winning condition (which is regarded as the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the time saving state, the game balls are awarded to the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D a total of five times or more. As a result, the winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the eleventh effect mode, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A. Then, when the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the timer for the specific effect A times out, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B. Then, when the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is satisfied in the probabilistic state or the time saving state before the timer for the specific effect B times out, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Will be done.

In the twelfth effect mode shown in FIG. 57, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a first start winning opening, a first starting winning opening, and a second general winning opening 9050B. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a second start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a third general winning opening 9050C, and a fourth general winning opening. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of 9050D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

As in the 9th to 12th production forms, the general winning openings (general winning openings and starting winning openings in the 12th production form) that are the targets of winning the game ball for executing the specific effect are determined according to the game state. By making them different, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the game state. In addition, in the 9th effect mode to the 12th effect form, in order to establish the target winning opening to be won in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state and the second winning condition in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. An example is shown in which the target winning openings to be awarded are all different, but not limited to this form, the target winning openings in the normal state and the target winning openings in the probabilistic state or the time saving state are partially different. It may be common. For example, both the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include winning the second general winning opening 9050B.

[13th production form to 16th production form]
In the thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect form shown in FIG. 58, the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation. However, when the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) outside the period of the reach fluctuation or the period before the establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A.

Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically a fixed decorative symbol (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach). It is the period until the symbol) is stopped and displayed.
Further, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically the period during which the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) is executed. It is the period from the start of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) to the period before the reach state is established.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the thirteenth production form to the sixteenth production form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first production form to the fourth production form, respectively. It has become. In any of the production forms, when the timing when the first prize condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second prize condition. When the established timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th production form to 20th production form]
In the 17th effect mode to the 20th effect form shown in FIG. 59, when the timing at which the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. When (2) the period outside the reach variation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach variation is established, the specific effect B is executed.

The winning conditions in the 17th production form to the 20th production form are the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the 5th production form to the 8th production form, respectively. In any of the production forms, if the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established due to the reach fluctuation, the specific production A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[21st production form to 24th production form]
In the 21st effect mode to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 60, when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed. If the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) a period outside the reach variation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach variation, the specific effect B is executed.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 21st production form to the 24th production form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 9th production form to the 12th production form, respectively. It has become. In any of the production forms, if the timing when the first prize condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second prize condition is satisfied. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, and different types of specific effect are executed according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

[25th production form and 26th production form]
In the 25th effect mode shown in FIG. 61, unlike the 1st effect mode to the 24th effect mode, the general winning openings (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) are used regardless of the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of three or more times. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D) regardless of the game state or the game period. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the 26th effect mode shown in FIG. 61, unlike the 1st effect mode to the 24th effect mode, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general) is within 120 seconds regardless of the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of three or more times in the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, regardless of the game state or the game period, the second prize is obtained by winning a total of five or more game balls in the general prize openings (first general prize opening 9050A to fourth general prize opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The condition is met. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In this way, the number of prizes in the general prize opening is increased by executing different effects according to the number of prizes in the general prize opening and the frequency of winning (the number of prizes in the predetermined period) regardless of the game state and the game period. And the frequency of winning can be interesting. In this example, the production mode (output voice) differs depending on the number of prizes and the winning frequency to the general winning opening, and the variable display to be notified is different (specific production A: variable display being executed, Specific effect B: Variable display that has not been executed, but is not limited to this, and whether or not to suggest the display result of variable display differs depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency (variable display). For example, an effect that announces the display result of the variable display and an effect that is not related to the display result of the variable display may be executable, and the effect that suggests the gaming state or not is different (for example, high probability). It may be possible to execute an effect of notifying that the player is in a state and an effect not related to the game state).

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general winning opening designation command to generate a prize in the general winning opening, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has won a prize, and that a prize has been generated in the start winning opening by receiving the start winning opening designation command, and which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is used for the game. It is possible to identify whether or not the ball has won a prize, and it is possible to identify that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening by receiving the large winning opening winning command. Therefore, as the winning number management table, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 62 can be stored and updated.

The second starting winning opening is formed by a normal variable winning ball device 906B, and the normal variable winning ball device 906B is open-controlled (opening in which the game ball can win or is easy to win from a closed state in which the game ball does not win or is difficult to win. By switching to the state), the game ball can be won. Further, the large winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 907, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is open-controlled (the game ball can win or is easy to win from the closed state where the game ball does not win or it is difficult to win. By switching to the open state), the game ball can be won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62, the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball device 907 are classified into a winning opening for which a game ball can be won by the operation of the accessory. On the other hand, the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D and the 1st starting winning opening are always open, and the game ball can be won regardless of the operation of the accessory. It is divided into.

In the prize number management table of FIG. 62, a game ball has won a prize in each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening. The number of prize balls sometimes given (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (11,36,22,14,754,315,420 in this example), which is the number of times the game ball has won in the winning opening, is multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out by winning a game ball in the winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the number of winnings of each winning opening (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420, respectively) with respect to the total number of winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example). And (2) the total number of winnings in each winning opening (1572 in this example), the non-role winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D and 1st starting winning) The ratio of the number of winnings (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the ratio of the number of winnings (315 + 420) of the character winning opening (second starting winning opening and the large winning opening), and (3) the total number of winnings of each winning opening (3) In this example, the ratio of the number of prizes other than the large prize opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) to 1572) and the ratio of the number of prizes (420) of the large prize opening are stored.

In addition, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning slot (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning slot (9268 in this example). And (2) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (9268 in this example), the non-role winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D and 1st starting winning) The ratio of the number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508), the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) of the character winning openings (second starting winning opening and large winning opening), and (3) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (3) In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the large winning opening (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) to 9268) and the ratio of the number of payouts of the large winning opening (6300) are stored.

Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is set to the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 90120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Displayed on device 905. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall is paid out by winning the game ball in the character winning opening for the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball in each winning opening. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as "first payout ratio", which is 74.77% in this example). In addition, the total number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball in each winning opening (9268) is the number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening (6300). The ratio (hereinafter referred to as "second payout ratio", which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 90120 shall notify the fact in a identifiable manner. .. In the example of FIG. 62, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted in a thick frame. Further, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 90120 shall notify the fact in a identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 62, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted in a thick frame.

In this way, the effect control CPU 90120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 905, and the comparison result with the predetermined first reference ratio and the second reference ratio can be obtained. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. In addition, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, for example, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 905 by the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and the setting operation by the operation button 9030. Often, when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the amusement park side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, and may be displayed, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901 for gaming. In the device, the received first payout ratio and the second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and in the information management device, the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. It is possible to store the ratio and display it on the display device.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs the general winning opening designation command, the starting winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command to the effect control CPU 90120, the external output information corresponding to these commands is output. Information that can identify which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D the game ball has won, and the starting winning opening has been won. The corresponding gaming device provides information that can identify whether the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and information that can identify that a prize has occurred in the large winning opening. It shall be output to an external device such as (card unit, ring lamp device) or information management device (hall computer).

This makes it possible to specify the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received the information in the above, it is possible to store the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 62 for each gaming machine and update it. As a result, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine can be grasped. Further, for each gaming machine, it is possible to grasp whether or not the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether or not the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

Further, regarding the totaling period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 48 or FIG. 62) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901, if no setting is made for the totaling period, the pachinko machine This is the period from the start of the power supply of the gaming machine 901 to the stop of the power supply. As the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 was stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table was reset (the number of winnings to each winning opening became 0), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 was restarted. Occasionally, the number of winnings to each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is 0. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted without being backed up.

The aggregation period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 48 or FIG. 62) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be set on the game hall side, for example, the operation. It is possible to set the aggregation period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) related to the gaming machine by using the button 9030. Further, in the game device (card unit or call lamp device), the clerk of the game hall inputs a desired totaling period by an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 901, and the totaling period is transmitted. It may be set as (stored in RAM 90122). Further, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs a desired totaling period by an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is each pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a pachinko machine selected as a setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 901) and set as the aggregation period (stored in the RAM 90122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning number management table for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours) is created, and these are displayed on the image display device 905, or a gaming device (card) provided correspondingly. It is possible to output to a unit, a call lamp device) and display it on the display device of the gaming device, or output it to an information management device (hall computer) and display it on the display device of the information management device. ..

In addition, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command output from the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the external device that stores and updates information (values of each item in FIG. 48 or FIG. 62), by setting the aggregation period by the input device provided in the external device, for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours). It is possible to create a winning number management table and display it on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (card unit or call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number management table for each predetermined period related to the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device. When the external device is an information management device that manages game information for each gaming machine, it is possible to display the winning number management table for each predetermined period on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[27th production form]
Both the specific effect A and the specific effect B described above foretell the variable display result in the special figure game depending on the effect mode, but are executed in connection with the winning of the game ball to the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. As a specific effect, it is also possible to execute an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. FIG. 63 illustrates a specific effect C (point-giving effect) as an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game.

In the 27th effect mode shown in FIG. 64 and the 29th effect mode described later, each time a game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 Whether or not the specific effect C is executed is determined based on the execution decision random number, and if it is determined to be executed, the specific effect C is executed. When the specific effect C is executed, the total points of the point storage areas formed in the RAM 90122 are added by 1, and as shown in FIG. 63, the image display device 905 contains an image including the characters "1 point". 902000 is displayed.

That is, every time a game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed as to whether or not 1 point is given, and the lottery is won. In this case, it is an effect form in which a point-giving effect in which 1 point is given is executed. Benefits are given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

For example, when the total points reach 5 (when winning 5 times), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. .. Further, when the total points reach 10 (when winning 10 times), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server. The player can access the music providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

In the 27th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the rate is 80%. Execute the specific effect C. The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

As with the specific effect A and the specific effect B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C is provided. Every time the specific effect C is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

Here, the total points of the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 are set to 10 regardless of the winning history of the winning history storage area (even if the winning history of the winning history storage area is deleted, it is not reset). After reaching 0 (in this example, after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), the value is reset to 0, and 1 is added again as the specific effect C is executed.

In the 27th effect mode and the 29th effect form described later, a specific effect is generated based on (1) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate of execution is lower than the rate of (2) the specific effect being executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It is set. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point-giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game, the execution status of the special figure game and the number of reserved memories are determined. However, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to the variable display result in the special figure game is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is determined by (2) the variable display of the special symbol is executed. If the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no target for the change result notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied (general winning). The specific effect is not executed at the timing when the prize is won in the mouth, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game as the specific effect.

In the 27th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). May be good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 27th production form, (1) the game ball is specified based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on (2) the game ball winning the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be higher.

[28th production form]
In the 28th effect mode, unlike the 27th effect form, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the 28th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) , Does not execute the specific effect A.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the specific effect A is either a first mode in which only the voice effect is executed or a second mode in which the accessory effect is executed together with the voice effect. This is a variation result advance notice effect that suggests the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied, before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the specific effect B is either a first mode in which only the voice effect is executed or a second mode in which the accessory effect is executed together with the voice effect. This is a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the specific effect C has a variable display display result (whether or not it becomes a big hit symbol) related to the special figure game and a variable display display result (whether or not it becomes a hit symbol) related to the normal figure game. It is a production that is not related to any of (), and points are given to the player according to the winning of the general winning opening.

As described above, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (the above-mentioned "" The process of "holding the execution of the specific effect A and executing it when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied" is not performed), and it is specified only in the period of (1). The effect A is executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the 28th effect mode, as a specific effect, a specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed. I am trying to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing exists. do not. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then specified when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. When the effect A is executed, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, which may rather reduce the interest.
Therefore, in the 28th effect mode, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect A is not executed.

In the 28th production mode, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and in the case of the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%. In such a form, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening). The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the case of (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period) or the period of (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Also, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at different ratios.

Further, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), the special feature being executed is further added. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be different depending on the variable display result of the figure game, whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, and the like. For example, when the effect control CPU 90120 decides to use the final decoration symbol as the jackpot symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the final decoration symbol is set as the off symbol. If it is decided, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th production form]
In the 29th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories). When (2) the number of reserved memories is 0 but the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening ((1) or (2) above). In the case of the period of), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. If it has not been decided to execute the above (in the case of the period (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

Every time the specific effect C is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the 29th production mode, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or at least the variable display of the special symbol is determined to be executed ((1) above). Or (in the case of period (2)), the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is set lower than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed when the decision to execute is not made (when the period is the period (3) above). During the periods (1) and (2), the effects corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect) are being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. , The player is usually more interested in these effects including the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (3), the player is able to execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this.
Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the periods of (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point-giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game, the execution status of the special figure game and the number of reserved memories are determined. However, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when a look-ahead notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more is adopted as the specific effect as in the specific effect B, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories. In the case of the period when is 0, there is no target of the look-ahead notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more (the general winning opening is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game as the specific effect.

In the 29th production mode, the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When it is decided to execute (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executed only when it is not decided to execute the variable display of (3). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 29th production form, is the variable display of the special symbol executed at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D? Or, at least when it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the rate at which the specific effect is executed. If it is not determined and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (in the case of the period of (3) above), the ratio may be set to be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed.

In addition, the timing at which the variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing at which the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and includes simultaneous). In the case of, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game of. In addition, the timing when the game ball wins the start winning opening (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied) and the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and includes the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed not immediately after the specific effect is executed, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the number of reserved storages has increased. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game of.

[30th production form]
In the thirtieth effect mode, unlike the 29th effect form, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the thirtieth production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories). If the total number of reserved memories is within the period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), (3) the period during which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). If is, the specific effect B is not executed.

As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (The above-mentioned process of "holding the execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of stored storages becomes 1 or more" is not performed), and only in the case of the period (1). The specific effect B is executed. Every time the specific effect B is executed, the prize history of the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the thirtieth effect mode, as a specific effect, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed. I try to improve my interest in directing. However, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) when the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no target of the look-ahead notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is set when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. If it is executed, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, which may rather reduce the interest. Therefore, in the thirtieth effect mode, when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period when the number of reserved memories is 0), the specific effect B is not executed. ..

In the thirtieth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). Will execute the specific effect B at a rate of 80%, and if it is the period (2) or (3) (within the period without hold memory), execute the specific effect B at a rate of 20%. You may do so. In such a form, when a prize is won in the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding memory), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. In this way, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with hold memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without hold memory). ), The specific effect B may be executed, and the specific effect B may be executed at different ratios.

Further, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with the holding memory), the holding is further held. The execution ratio of the specific effect B differs depending on the variable display result of the special figure game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the execution of the special figure game related to the reserved memory. You may do so. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the start winning decision result specification command for designating the "big hit" is stored in the start winning command storage area (that is, the variable display result of the special figure game is the jackpot symbol). When is present), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and the start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "big hit" is not stored in the starting winning command storage area (that is,). If there is no hold memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game is a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st production form]
In the 31st production mode shown in FIG. 65, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (1) If it is within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). In some cases, the specific effect C (point-giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) and the period (2). It is supposed to execute different types of specific effects. As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the production performed when the game ball wins a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning openings 9050A to 4th, which are the winning conditions). (Including the winning history to any of the general winning openings 9050D) is deleted.

In the 31st effect mode, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed for the specific effect. I am trying to improve my interest. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing exists. do not. In this case, if no specific effect is executed, the execution frequency of the specific effect will decrease. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the special effect game is related. If the specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, which may rather reduce the interest.

In the 31st effect mode, when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable in the normal figure game is changed instead of the specific effect A. Such a problem can be avoided by executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific effect of any type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) for each prize in the general prize opening, and any type is used for each prize in the general prize opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd production form]
In the 32nd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the number of reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories). If the total number of reserved memories is within the period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0. In the case where the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1), the period (2), and ( Different types of specific effects are executed depending on the period of 3).
As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the production performed when the game ball wins a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the prize history of the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general prize that is a prize condition). (Including the winning history to any of the opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 32nd production mode, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the pre-reading notice exists, the specific production B (pre-reading notice) When the effect) is executed and it is within the period of (2), that is, when the target of the look-ahead notice does not exist but the target of the change result notice exists, the specific effect A (change result notice effect) Is executed, that is, when neither the target of the look-ahead notice nor the target of the fluctuation result notice exists in the period of (3), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed.

In this way, by selecting and executing a specific effect that can be executed immediately when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening is appropriately improved. I try to let you. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific effect of any type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) for each prize in the general prize opening, and any type is used for each prize in the general prize opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

In the 32nd production mode, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless of that, that is, regardless of whether or not there is a target of the fluctuation result notice, the look-ahead notice effect is executed. That is, in the case of "there are both the target of the fluctuation result notice and the target of the look-ahead notice", the look-ahead notice effect is preferentially executed.
Not limited to such a form, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing, the fluctuation result notice When the effect is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at that timing, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed. That is, when "the target of the fluctuation result notice and the target of the look-ahead notice exist", the fluctuation result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modifications of the 27th production form to the 32nd production form]
In the 27th effect mode to the 32nd effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be different depending on the state when the game ball wins the general winning opening. The "state" referred to here is a state generated as a result of a game in a gaming machine, and is a state based on the game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect shall be different according to the classification of the state. For example, in the 27th effect mode, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is within (1) the symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect is performed at a rate of 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a probability change state or a time saving state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the (2) symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the gaming state at that time is a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the specific effect C shall be executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

Further, in the 27th effect mode to the 32nd effect mode, the type of the specific effect to be executed may be different depending on the state when the game ball wins the general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect mode, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is within (1) the symbol change period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect A (change result notice). The effect) is executed, and if the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the (2) symbol fluctuation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed. If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the classification of the state for different types of the specific effect is (1) the game state is the normal state, or (2) the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Or, it is not limited to (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. For example, it may be classified into (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation and (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach variation. Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed? It may be a division. Further, it may be classified into (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference in these categories.

The specific effect C (point-giving effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. 49, like the other specific effects A and B executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It has become like. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 50). It is feasible only in case. In this way, the intentions of the amusement park and the player can be reflected in whether or not the specific effect C is executed.

In addition, the specific effect C (point awarding effect) is not limited to the one in which 1 point is given for each winning in the general winning opening, and 2 points or 3 points are given for each winning in the general winning opening. It may be what is done. The number of points given may differ depending on, for example, which general winning opening the gaming ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening, for example. The gaming state may be different depending on the classification such as whether it is a normal state, a probabilistic state, or a time saving state.

Further, in the specific effect C (point awarding effect), points may be given according to factors other than winning the general winning opening. For example, points are given according to winning the starting winning opening. The points may be given according to the establishment of the reach state or the like.

[33rd production form]
FIG. 66 illustrates a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 66, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) refers to the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 displayed on the image display device 905 according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is a production that can be changed step by step from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages.

In the example of FIG. 66A, the filling area 902100a (black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 902100 is set to 0 steps according to the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. It has increased from (white part occupies 10/10) to 1 step (black part occupies 1/10 and white part occupies 9/10) (gauge +1). Further, in the example of FIG. 66B, the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 has 0 to 3 stages (black portion) in response to the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

In this way, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and reaches 10 stages (the black part in the gauge image occupies 10/10). In that case), the player shall be given a privilege. For example, as in the case of the specific effect C described above, the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server, and the player can display the desired image or music on the image providing server or music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

Not limited to this, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a special music is output as BGM during the game. It may be possible. Alternatively, a variable result notice effect for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game executed at the timing when the filling area 902100a reaches 10 stages may become a big hit symbol may be executed. A look-ahead notice effect for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game held at the timing when the area 902100a reaches 10 stages may become a big hit symbol may be executed.

That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. It may be an effect related to the variable display result in the game or the variable display result in the normal drawing game. Further, the effect may be related to the game state, or may be an effect not related to the game state. Further, each time the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 steps, a different effect may be executed. Further, different effects may be executed depending on the gaming state or the like when the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages.

When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages, a message to that effect is notified by displaying a message on the image display device 905, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the like, and then the gauge image 902100. The filling region 902100a in is reset to the 0 stage. After the reset, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 will be increased again according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening.

In the 33rd effect mode to the 37th effect mode shown in FIGS. 67 to 68, each time a game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 90124 is specified. Based on the random number for determining the execution of the effect, it is determined whether or not to increase the stage of the filling area 902100a (hereinafter referred to as "gauge level") in the gauge image 902100 by one step, and if it is determined to execute, the gauge level is determined. Is increased by one step from the present. That is, every time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the gauge level by one level. If you win, the gauge level will increase by one level.

In the 33rd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) a rate of 80% during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by one level. The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

As in the case of the specific effect A to the specific effect C, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) will be accompanied. The winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 33rd effect form, and the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening is performed during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball is that (2) the game ball won the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Based on that, the gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to increase the gauge level by increasing the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (1), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 33rd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the gauge level is not increased, and (2) it is possible to increase the gauge level if it is during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). May be good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol fluctuation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on (2) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It may be set to be.

[34th production form]
In the 34th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and until the variable display of the special symbol is completed (the confirmed special symbol is displayed). It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, when the variation start command and the variation pattern specification command are received, the variation time of the special symbol specified by the variation pattern specification command is set as the value of the variation time timer, so that the effect control CPU 90120 has the variation time. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbol ends (until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 34th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) when the symbol is stopped for less than 10 seconds. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed will be, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (3), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, in the 34th production form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. It is possible, and if it is the period (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3). ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening when it takes less than 10 seconds to stop the symbol.

Further, in the 34th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has a decorative symbol that is executed when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). If the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and if the display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning mouth 9050D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the jackpot symbol. May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% when the displayed result is an out-of-order symbol.

[35th production form]
As described above, the specific effect B is illustrated as a look-ahead advance notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special figure game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 54 (b), is the start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "big hit" included in the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect is the first aspect (audio effect only) or the second aspect (audio effect and accessory effect). That is, in the look-ahead notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) that is the target of the look-ahead notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target change. It has become difficult.

As a look-ahead notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect of notifying the target fluctuation.
For example, as described above, in the start winning memory display area 905H, a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. Is provided. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the start winning judgment result specification command, if it is a command that specifies "big hit", the display part corresponding to the command is displayed corresponding to the command that specifies "off". It is possible to execute a hold change effect that is displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from that of the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to a display portion displayed in a special mode, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display number of times to be executed until the target variation.

For example, if the command specifies "big hit" when the start winning judgment result specification command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if the command specifies "missing" when the start winning judgment result specification command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. The display part corresponding to the command shall be displayed in the normal mode. In this way, when the display part corresponding to the hold memory generated by the start prize is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start prize, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Every), it will move to the left, and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) corresponding to the display part of the special mode is satisfied, the special mode The display part disappears from the start winning memory display area 905H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start prize to the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game corresponding to the start prize.

That is, when the start conditions of the variable display game are satisfied according to the order in which the start conditions of the variable display game are satisfied, the hold change effect is executed, so that the display portion displayed in the special mode (the target of the hold change effect). Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to the variable display hold memory that is not the target of the hold change effect) existing to the left of the variable display hold memory) , It becomes possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display, which is the target of the pending change effect, is executed.

The timing of displaying the display portion in a special mode is not limited to the start winning prize. For example, at the time of winning a start, the display portion may be displayed in a normal mode, and after a predetermined effect, the normal mode may be changed to a special mode, and the timing when the start condition is satisfied (display mode of each display part). May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left). In these modes, from the timing when the display part corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice changes from the normal state to the special mode, until the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

In the 35th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is (1) the pre-reading advance notice production is not executed and the target change is also executed. If there is no period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the pending change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more. If the period is (when there are two or more special figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the ratio is 40%. Increases the gauge level by one level.

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 1. In the case of the period (when there is one special figure game in which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge is 20%. Level increases by one level.

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (in the hold change effect). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10% during the period during which the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special aspect is executed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 35th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more is up to (3) the target change. When the remaining variable display count is 1, the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) During the period), it is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Further, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target change than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired.
On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, in the 35th production form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. It is possible, and if it is the period of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of remaining variable display times until the target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) the remaining variable until the target fluctuation. It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of impressions is 1, and (4) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target fluctuation.

Further, in the 35th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4)). In the case of (?), The gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is displayed. When it becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and when the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general When the timing when the game ball wins in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4). In the case of the period of, if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15%, and if the variable display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 10%. May be increased.

[36th production form]
In the 36th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed. In that case, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed. If it is the period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) the period during which the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed and the reach state is established. In the case of the period after the establishment, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 36th production form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is general after (4) the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, in the 36th production form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased. It is possible, and if it is the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 36th production form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach fluctuation is executed and before the establishment of the reach state is (4). ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach fluctuation is executed and in the period after the reach state is established.

[37th production form]
In the 37th effect mode shown in FIG. 68, the rate of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases differs between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between the case where the game ball wins the 9050C and the case where the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the rate at which the gauge level increases differs depending on the general winning opening where the game ball wins, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball wins, and improves the interest. be able to.

For example, the first general prize provided near the edge of the game area 9010 rather than the game ball winning in the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D. By making the gauge level higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening 9050B and the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, the interest in winning the general winning opening, which is more difficult to win, is increased. You should try to increase it.

In addition, in the 37th production form, when a game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening or the 4th general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening can be used. If the game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening 9050B. Alternatively, the gauge level may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the third general winning opening 9050C.

[38th production form]
In the 38th effect mode to the 42nd effect mode shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Further, in the 38th effect mode to the 42nd effect form, the gauge level that increases with one winning of the general winning opening is not limited to one stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three steps according to one winning in the general winning opening.

In the 38th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one level (gauge +1), and (2) the gauge level is increased by three levels during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increase (gauge +3).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening is performed during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of the game ball is (2) that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It is set less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (1), the interest of the specific production may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is increased by increasing the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. Is in a situation where it is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (1), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 38th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is (within the period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), and (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (2) In the case of (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps may be set to, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%).
Further, contrary to the example shown in the 38th production form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol fluctuation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of stages in which the level increases is greater than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on (2) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). May be set to increase.

In addition, as a privilege given when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege having a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code that can download only images may be displayed, or a two-dimensional code that can download images and music may be displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is larger than that to the former. The number of steps in which the gauge level increases may indicate the magnitude of the privilege value given when the gauge level reaches 10 steps. For example, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), and when the benefit value is large, the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. When the rate of increase is, for example, 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) the privilege value is small when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is 50% (the rate of changing only one step is 50%), and when the privilege value is large, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 80%. (The rate of changing only one step may be 20%).

[39th production form]
In the 39th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by 3 steps (gauge +3). The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +2). The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 39th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped in 10 seconds or more is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol is stopped. It is sometimes set higher than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed will be, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), the interest of the specific production may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (3), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In addition, in the 39th production form, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two steps or more. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the case of the period (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step). May be 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 39th production form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (2). 3) The gauge level may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level is increased based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped in less than 10 seconds.

Further, in the 39th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has a decorative symbol that is executed when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). If the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and if the display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps, while the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general If the timing when the game ball wins in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the jackpot symbol, the gauge level is set to two levels. If the number is increased and the displayed result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[40th production form]
In the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is (1) the pre-reading advance notice production is not executed and the target change is also executed. If there is no period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the pending change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more. If the period is (when there are two or more special figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge level is 3. Increase in stages (gauge +3).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 1. If the period is (when there is one special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge level is increased by two steps. (Gauge +2).

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (in the hold change effect). The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1) during the period during which the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special aspect is executed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 40th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the target change. The number of gauge level increases that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number up to 1 is 1, (4) When the remaining variable display number until the target change is 0 (target change) It is set more than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening during the execution period of. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Further, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target change than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 40th production mode, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by 2 steps or more. For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level is set to 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period of (3) and (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (only one step). The rate of change may be 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 40th production form, (2) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until the target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target fluctuation. It may be set to be less than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the variable display count is 1, and (4) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target fluctuation.

Further, in the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4)). In the case of (?), The gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is displayed. If it becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 4 steps, and if the variable display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D. When the game ball wins a prize in the period (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and the variable display result becomes an out-of-order symbol. The gauge level is increased by two steps, and when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (4), the variable display in the target fluctuation If the result is a big hit symbol, the gauge level may be increased by two steps, and if the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[41st production form]
In the 41st production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4). Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed. In that case, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps (gauge +3).

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed. If it is the period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +3), and (4) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed and the reach state is established. In the subsequent period, the gauge level is increased by one level (gauge +1).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 41st production form, (3) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is (4) after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It is set more than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (4), the interest of the specific production may be spoiled. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 41st production mode, when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased by 2 steps or more. For example, the rate of changing the gauge level is 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the case of the period (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step). May be 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 41st effect form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach fluctuation is executed and before the reach state is established is (3). 4) The gauge level may be set to be less than the number of steps in which the gauge level is increased during the period in which the reach fluctuation is executed and in the period after the reach state is established.

[42nd production form]
In the 42nd production mode shown in FIG. 70, the number of steps for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). , Gauge level increases by 1 level (gauge +1). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +2).

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). Increases the gauge level by 3 levels (gauge +3). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). The gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 42nd production form, the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased is different between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning The number of steps of the gauge level to be increased is different depending on whether the game ball wins the mouth 9050C or the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the number of gauge level stages to be increased differs depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the interest is improved. Can be made to.

For example, the first general prize provided near the edge of the game area 9010 rather than the game ball winning in the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. By increasing the number more than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening 9050B and the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, it is possible to win a prize in the general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It's a good idea to enhance your interest.

In the 42nd production mode, when a game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening or the 4th general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 steps or more is, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only 1 step is 20). %), And when a game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 steps or more is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only 1 step is 80%). May be good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production form, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening. It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C.

[Modification example of 33rd effect form to 42nd effect form]
Determine the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form, which is a reference division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form. The criteria for this is not limited to the above example.
For example, the division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level and the division for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased are as follows: (1) the gaming state is the normal state, or (2) the gaming state is It may be classified as a probabilistic state or a time saving state. Further, it may be classified into (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. Further, it may be classified into (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good.

The gauge image 902100 is displayed even when the filling region 902100a is at the minimum 0 stage, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 902100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the game state is the normal state, and the effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed, but the gauge image 902100 is not displayed when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state (gauge). The effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

The display of the gauge image 902100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are executed during the period when the predetermined effect is executed, and may not be executed during the period when the predetermined effect is not executed. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening only during the period when the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 905 is a predetermined background image (predetermined production stage period). Or the gauge level may be increased. In addition, a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening only during the period when the display portion in the starting prize memory display area 905H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white suggesting that the display portion may change to a special mode). When this is done, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 simultaneously produces the effect (at the same time, when the RTC (real-time clock) (not shown) provided on the effect control board 9012 reaches a predetermined time, the effect control CPU 90120 simultaneously outputs the effect (a gaming machine of the same model has a predetermined time). When the effect) is executed, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous effect.

Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. At this time, different production sounds may be output according to the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by three steps, it is compared with the case where the gauge level is increased by one step. The volume of the effect sound may be increased.

Further, it is preferable to output the effect sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from the effect sound related to the special figure game and the effect sound related to the normal figure game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be louder than the volume of the effect sound related to the normal figure game, but may be lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game. Further, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game, but may be lower than the volume of the error sound for notifying the gaming machine error.

Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be louder than the volume in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.

In addition, the specific effect whose production mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the general winning opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the mode of the displayed character gradually changes. It may change (for example, the size of the displayed character increases, or the items owned by the character change), and the characters that can be selected by the player gradually increase. May be good. Further, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed stepwise, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed stepwise. Further, the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R may be changed stepwise.

The specific effect D (gauge update effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. 49, like the other specific effects A to C executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It has become like. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 50). It is feasible only in case. In this way, the intentions of the amusement park and the player can be reflected in whether or not the specific effect D is executed.

[43rd production form]
The above-mentioned specific effects A to D are all effects that are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. You may do it. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the game ball does not win any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D during the 10-minute game period, as shown in FIG. 71, It is possible to execute a specific effect E that displays an image imitating the form of a general winning opening and a notification image 902200 or the like including the characters "There is no general winning" on the image display device 905.

In this way, the specific effect is not limited to the effect executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, but the effect executed based on the fact that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening (general winning). It may be a production that suggests the difficulty of winning a prize in the mouth). That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event of winning a game ball to a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or a game event does not occur).

In the 43rd effect mode shown in FIG. 72, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period during which the game ball has not won a prize in the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 90100. When either the designated command or the large winning opening winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer and the timer is started. Then, if the general winning opening designation command is received before the non-winning judgment timer times out (10 minutes before the timer set), 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning judgment timer, and the non-winning judgment timer is set again. Start the timer.

On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out because the general winning opening designation command is not received before the non-winning determination timer times out, the notification image 902200 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 71. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the broadcast image 902200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the non-winning determination timer in this case is a value according to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If the command is not received, the game end determination for determining that the game has ended is performed, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended, the processing due to the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed during the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the processing caused by the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Execution of specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended. , Resume updating the non-winning judgment timer.

That is, the non-winning determination timer is updated during the period during which the player is playing the game (the game end determination is not made), and is generally 10 minutes during the period during which the player is playing the game. When the number of winnings in the winning opening becomes 0, a time-out occurs (the time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 90120). As a result, when the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed if no prize is generated in the general winning opening for 10 minutes.

In the above-mentioned production mode, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game based on whether or not the game ball is being fired toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. It may be. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the firing motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, if the general winning opening is not won in the predetermined period (10-minute game period) even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. Notify that no prize has been awarded to the general prize opening. By this notification, the player can grasp that no prize has been generated in the general winning opening and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a machine) when playing a game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the specific effect E is executed frequently), the game nails are used so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the machine.

Further, if the general winning opening is not won even though the game is played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not played by the player. When no prize has been awarded to the general winning opening, the non-winning determination timer is paused (the effect control CPU 90120 is prevented from executing the process based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer). Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the general winning opening has not been won because the player has not played the game. In this case, the game The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than when it is determined that the general winning opening has not been won even though the game is being played by the person.

[44th production form]
As the specific effect E, it is not limited to the one that notifies that the general winning opening has not been won within the predetermined period (the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than 1), but is not limited to the general one within the predetermined period. It may be possible to identifiablely notify that the number of winnings in the winning opening is less than a predetermined number. In the 44th effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 90100. When either the designated command or the large winning opening winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to 0. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time the general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

Then, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 90120 is within a predetermined period in the specific effect E. Notify that the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or notify the number of winnings within a predetermined period. For example, the message "The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is less than 3" and / or the message "The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is only 1" is displayed on the image display device 905.

When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is set again as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the winning number determination timer in this case is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect E. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or more than a predetermined predetermined number (for example, 3), the winning number determination timer does not execute the specific effect E. Set the value to 30 minutes again and start the timer again.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If the command is not received, the game end determination is performed to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended, the processing (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the time-out of the winning number determination timer is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed during the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the processing caused by the winning number determination timer timing out (specifically, the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Execution of specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended. , Resume updating the winning number determination timer.

That is, the winning number determination timer is updated during the period during which the player is playing the game (the game end determination is not made), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period during which the player is playing the game. (The time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 90120). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

In the above-mentioned production mode, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game based on whether or not the game ball is being fired toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. It may be. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the firing motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30-minute game period) is less than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. It is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning a prize in the general winning opening is low and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a table) when playing a game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the specific effect E is executed frequently), the game nails are used so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the machine.

Further, if the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 90120 executes a process based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer). By not doing so), the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the game is not performed by the player. , In this case, the specific effect is lower than the case where it is determined that the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is played by the player. E may be executed.

[45th production form]
In the 43rd effect mode and the 44th effect mode, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of prizes to the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time. Although it was decided to execute the specific effect E regardless of the above, the execution rate of the specific effect E may be different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 45th production mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed when it is in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed when it is in the probability change state or the time saving state.

The gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. You may. In this way, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E at a different ratio according to the game state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th production form]
In the 43rd effect mode and the 44th effect mode, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of prizes to the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time. Regardless of the above, it was decided to execute the specific effect E in a common mode, but the effect mode of the specific effect E may be different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th production mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output) in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is performed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. It is executed in two modes (image display only).

Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is to notify the image display device 905 of the fact by displaying an image indicating that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. It is a mode in which the notification is performed by the voice output in which the voice is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which the notification is performed only by the image display and the notification by the voice output is not performed.

The gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of, for example, 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and (2) in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. May execute the specific effect E in the first aspect at a rate of, for example, 20% (execute in the second aspect at a rate of 80%). In this way, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modifications of the 43rd production form to the 46th production form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is the display setting table of FIG. 49, like the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. According to this, the presence or absence of execution can be switched. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 50). It is feasible only in case. In this way, the intentions of the amusement park and the player can be reflected in whether or not the specific effect E is executed.

For example, if the game hall side does not want to execute the specific effect E, by switching the display changeover switch 9032 to the non-display setting (first position), the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting. .. With such a configuration, the intention of the amusement park side is prioritized and reflected as to whether or not to execute the specific effect E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning the general winning opening. Can be made to.

Further, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect mode, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect mode, and the value of the winning number counter area, which are stored in the RAM 90122, are all electric. It is not backed up at the time of disconnection, and when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, it is deleted accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect mode are both invalid. Therefore, the value of the timer is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 90120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect mode becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restarted.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is restarted, the addition is started again from 0. become. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires a backup means at the time of power failure.

As in the 45th effect mode and the 46th effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the division for making the effect mode of the specific effect E different is (1) whether the gaming state is the normal state or (2). ) The gaming state is not limited to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. For example, it may be classified as (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified into (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation and (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed? It may be a division. Further, it may be classified into (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the mode of the specific effect E may be different depending on the difference in these categories.

The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is executed when the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not limited to such a form, among the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, only a specific general winning opening is targeted, and the number of winnings to the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less. For example, only the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, which have a higher frequency of winning the game ball than the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, are targeted at the general winning opening 9050C during a predetermined game period. The number of prizes won may be counted, and the specific effect E may be executed when the counted number of prizes is less than a predetermined number.

Further, in the 43rd to 46th production forms, if the number of prizes to the general winning opening within a certain period of time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than the predetermined number, the specific production E is executed. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of times the special figure game is executed, and may be, for example, a period during which the variable display related to the special figure game is executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is played by left-handed), a probabilistic state or a shortened time. It may be a period controlled by the state (a period during which the game is played by hitting right).

Further, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number with respect to the predetermined number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010. While the launch motor included in the hitting ball launching device is being driven, approximately 100 gaming balls are launched into the gaming area 9010 in one minute. Therefore, for example, the specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number for the number of hit balls of 1000 shots (corresponding to the game period of 10 minutes). .. In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 9010 is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. You may.

Further, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 differs depending on whether the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio or greater than or equal to the predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be executed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is low, the character A appears and the frequency of winning to the general winning opening is low. Character B appears when the ratio of the number of winning balls to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 9010 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio. Then, it is notified that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, the character C may appear to notify that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high.

(B) It may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to winning a prize in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. For example, if 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning in the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes. When the number is less than 30 (three prizes), the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening for the predetermined number of shot balls (for example, 1000 shots) fired in the game area 9010 is less than the predetermined number. May be determined, and the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. When the ratio is lower than the ratio of, the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is lower than the predetermined ratio and more than the predetermined ratio. In some cases, a specific effect of a different aspect may be executed.

In this way, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in the case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on the general winning opening where the game ball is won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to the predetermined number of winnings to the starting winning opening (for example, 100). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening is greater than the predetermined number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the starting winning opening (for example, 10000). It may be determined whether or not there are few prize balls, and the prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the general prize opening for the number of prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the starting prize opening. The specific effect E may be executed when the ratio of the numbers is calculated and the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning in the general winning opening to the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning in the starting winning opening is lower than the predetermined ratio. And, depending on the case where the ratio is equal to or more than a predetermined ratio, a specific effect of a different aspect may be executed.

Further, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out during the predetermined period when the game state is in the normal state (according to the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning of the starting winning opening and the winning of the general winning opening). Calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the general winning openings to the total number of prize balls paid out), and when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio , The specific effect E may be executed. In addition, a specific effect of a different mode may be executed according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, twice) for the predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the game machine. , The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the amount of money consumed in the game machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In such a form, a different predetermined number (for example, 4 yen is twice, 1 yen is 8) depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen or 1 yen) of the game medium used for the gaming machine. (Times, etc.), or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) are applied. In addition, the specific effect of different modes is executed depending on whether the ratio of the number of prizes to the general winning opening to the amount of money consumed by the gaming machine is lower than the predetermined ratio or more than the predetermined ratio. You may try to do it.

[47th production form]
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 75, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, and within the period in which the character is displayed, the first starting winning opening is entered. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second starting winning opening Based on the occurrence of any of the valid start winnings of the ball (that is, the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value). In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a hold change effect is executed in which the display portion corresponding to the hold variable display game including the variable display game based on the generated effective start prize is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. ..

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 holds the display portion corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize to be displayed in a special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode, based on the occurrence of the effective start prize. You may want to perform a change effect. For example, when a new effective start prize occurs, the displayed character takes an action such as swinging up a wand, and the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start prize. May be displayed in a special mode instead of the normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, the hold information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied exists).

Here, in the 47th effect form, and in the 48th effect form and the 49th effect form described later, each time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening, the random number circuit 90124 A random number for character determination is extracted from. Then, based on the extracted random numbers for character determination, whether or not to make the character appear, and when the character is to appear, which of the characters A to C is to appear is determined in the character determination table of FIG. 73. Determined at the indicated rate.

The character determination random number may be extracted by the effect control CPU 90120 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that the character is not controlled in the jackpot game state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled in the jackpot game state. .. Further, by not extracting the random number for character determination after the reach state is established within the period in which the variable display game is executed, it is possible to prevent the character from appearing after the reach state is established.

In the example of FIG. 73, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the character A appears at a rate of 10% when receiving the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the first general winning opening 9050A. It is decided to make character B appear at a rate of 30%, and to make character C appear at a rate of 60%. In addition, when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning of the second general winning opening 9050B, it is decided that no character appears at a rate of 50%, and character A appears at a rate of 35%. It is decided to make the character B appear at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to make the character C appear at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the third general winning opening 9050C, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 90%, and 10%. It is decided that the character C appears at a rate. In addition, when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning of the 4th general winning opening 9050D, it is decided that no character appears at a rate of 75%, and character C appears at a rate of 25%. Decide to let.

That is, in this example, when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left game area 9010A, the third general winning opening 9010B provided in the right game area 9010B. Characters will appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in either the general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The player fires the game ball into the left game area 9010A when the game state is in the normal state, and fires the game ball into the right game area 9010B when the game state is in the probability change state or the time saving state. Characters will appear at a higher rate than in the state or time saving state.

Then, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect form, the specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is based on the fact that the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, reach state) are satisfied during the period in which the character is displayed. , Specific effect G (variation result notice effect by dialogue)) is executed, so in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

As described above, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous as compared with the probabilistic state and the time saving state, and the player's game, for example, the interest in the variable display of the special figure game is low. By increasing the frequency of execution, we are trying to improve the interest.
On the other hand, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, it is advantageous as compared with the normal state, and the player is highly interested in the game, for example, the variable display of the special figure game. If the price remains high, it may spoil the interest. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 73, even when a game ball wins in the same general winning opening, the ratio of characters appearing may be different depending on the game state, for example, the normal state. When a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, a character appears at a rate of 50%, but in a probabilistic state and a time saving state, 10% when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B. Characters may appear at the rate of.

Further, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. In this way, in order to "make the execution ratio of the effect in one state different from the execution ratio of the effect in the other state", the effect can be executed only in one state, and the effect is not executed in the other state. Shall be included. Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 73, the appearance rate of the character in the probabilistic state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance rate of the character in the normal state.

Further, in the example of FIG. 73, when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A, the character appears at a higher rate than when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B. There is. Further, when the game ball wins the 4th general winning opening 9050D, the characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins the 3rd general winning opening 9050C. In this embodiment, when the game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A, the game ball wins more frequently in the second general winning opening 9050B than in the first general winning opening 9050A, and in the right game area 9010B. When the game ball is launched, the game ball wins more frequently in the third general winning opening 9050C than in the fourth general winning opening 9050D. That is, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where it is difficult for the game ball to win, the character appears at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win. On the contrary, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win, the character has a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where it is difficult for the game ball to win. It may be made to appear.

Further, in the example of FIG. 73, the characters that may be displayed when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B, which are frequently won in the normal state, are displayed. Although the characters are A to C, they may be displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which are frequently won in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. Character C is the only character with. In the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, which are game states in which the game interest is higher than that in the normal state, the situation that "the character appears but the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the character display period elapses" occurs, which causes the interest. Since it is possible that the display period will be lowered, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 73, even when a game ball wins in the same general winning opening, the characters appearing may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, the first character may appear. 2 Characters A to C may be displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 9050B, but the character when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. It may be possible that only C is displayed. Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 73, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probabilistic state and the normal state is set to be larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. You may.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 905.
It is assumed that all of the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning of the general winning opening. That is, since the character is displayed immediately after the winning of the general winning opening, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred.

When character A is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (effective start winning, reach state is established) within 1 minute from the start of display, the display of character A is started. When the character A is erased from the screen at the timing when 1 minute has passed, and (2) a predetermined condition is satisfied within 1 minute from the start of display, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (pending change effect)). ), Character A is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (including a condition related to the effect executed as the game progresses). Even if a valid start prize is generated, if the number of hold of the variable display game including the variable display game corresponding to the valid start prize is 1, the start condition is satisfied for the variable display game. Since the start condition is satisfied (the hold information is deleted) immediately after this, it becomes difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, if the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start prize is less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start prize is the predetermined number. If there are more than 1 in this example, the hold change effect may be executed.

Further, the character may be erased when the game shifts to the big hit game state or when the game end determination is performed by the effect control CPU 90120 described above. Further, the character displayed on the image display device 905 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped shall not be displayed again after the power supply is restarted. That is, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the character displayed before the power interruption on the image display device 905 again after the power supply is restarted is not performed.

It should be noted that when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed, the appearing character performs a predetermined action (that is, with the change in the mode of the displayed object), and the hold memory is stored. It is assumed that both the case where the mode of the corresponding display part is changed and the case where the mode is not changed are included. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (hold change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), the appearing character 903000 (this). In the example, it is set as character A, but in each hold memory due to the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001 possessed by the specific effect F (the case where the character B appears or the case where the character C appears in the hold change effect). This is the timing when the action effect that covers the corresponding display portion is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

Further, the fact that the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed means that the appearing character 903100 (in this example, the character B is used, but the specific effect G) is executed, as shown in FIGS. 77 (f) and 77 (g). (Character A may appear or character C may appear in the variation result advance notice effect)) utters a predetermined line, and the timing at which the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) ends is This is the timing when the character's dialogue is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined dialogue display period has elapsed).

When character B is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (effective start winning, reach state is established) within 2 minutes from the start of display, the display of character B is started. When the character B is erased from the screen at the timing when 2 minutes have passed, and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied. ), Character B is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

When character C is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) If the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) are not satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, from the start of display of character C. Character C is erased from the screen when 3 minutes have passed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect)) based on the condition is satisfied. ), Character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

In this way, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 905, which is the state after the game ball has won the general winning opening to the player. You can make them recognize that. Further, the period in which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed by satisfying the predetermined condition, and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period in which the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on is not executed, the player recognizes that "if the specified condition is satisfied while the character is displayed, the specific effect is executed", and the game is played in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. It will be done, and the interest of the game will be enhanced until the specific production is executed.

Further, since the display period differs depending on the displayed character, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is displayed. The player who confirms the type of the character can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest until the specific production is executed.

Further, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the setting ratio of the specific period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can place the game ball in any of the general winning openings. You will be interested in winning a prize.

(Specific example of specific production F (holding change production))
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 75, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905 and an effective start winning is generated, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. The pending change effect with the action of is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening in the state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value, and the second. A game ball is won in the second starting winning opening when the number of second reserved storages corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

The effect control CPU 90120 has received a start winning opening designation command designated as a "first starting winning slot" or a "second starting winning slot" designation, and a start winning decision result designation command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of a valid start prize. FIG. 76 shows a specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form.

In FIG. 76 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored in hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 2. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 905H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied. Is displayed in the normal mode, and the display portion (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied second is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 decides to make the character A appear at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B (see FIG. 73). In FIG. 76B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character 903000 (character A) holding the cane 903001 on the image display device 905. Character A shall appear on the screen immediately after the general prize.

Then, within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, it is assumed that the effective start winning prize is generated in the first starting winning opening and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In FIG. 76 (c), along with this, the number of reserved memories becomes 3, and the display portion (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied third is displayed in the normal mode. Whether or not the effect control CPU 90120, which has detected the occurrence of the effective start prize, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, changes the display portion corresponding to each of the three hold memories from the normal mode to the special mode. Is determined respectively.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a command for specifying each start winning decision result (not blank data) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. It contains valid data). Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), with respect to the start winning judgment result designation command for designating the "big hit", the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is decided that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed as the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "off", it was decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and a rate of 90%. Determines not to change the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command in the normal mode.

In this example, with respect to the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game in which the first and second start conditions are satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command should not be changed in the normal mode. Only for the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game in which (no pending change) is determined and the start condition is satisfied, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. It is assumed that it has been decided to let it (with pending changes).

Then, in the effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), the character 903000 (character A) directs the tip of the cane 903001 toward the start winning memory display area 905H, and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001. This causes an action effect in which the display portion corresponding to each reserved memory is surrounded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 76 (f), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the display mode of the left end and the second display portion from the left in the normal mode based on the above-mentioned determination as the action effect is executed. With respect to the third display portion from the left, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the above-mentioned determination. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, the character 903000 (character A) holding the wand 903001 and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the wand 903001 are erased from the screen.

As a result of the change in the mode of the display part accompanying this action effect, for the player, the character 903000 (character A) that appeared based on the winning of the general winning opening took an action, and as a result, the third display part from the left. Recognizes that has changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and expects the variable display game to be executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 76 (c) and 76 (d), with respect to the start winning judgment result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is usually set. When it is decided not to change the mode as it is (no change on hold), even after the action effect shown in FIG. 76 (e) is performed, as shown in FIG. 76 (g), three hold memories are stored. All of the three corresponding holding sites have not changed in the normal manner.

In this way, the specific effect F (pending change effect) is executed with the "effective start prize generated during the period when the character is displayed" as a trigger, so that the effective start prize is generated during the character display period. It is possible to make people interested in whether or not it is, and it is possible to enhance the interest from the time when the game ball wins the general prize opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. In addition, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening due to the effect configuration of notifying the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied, triggered by the event of winning the general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize to the execution of a specific production.

Further, with the action of the character 903000 (character A), among the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied, whether the display mode of any of the display parts changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Whether or not, and if it changes, it is possible to pay attention to which display mode of the display portion changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, by suggesting a variable display game that the player can expect, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, a common object (character A's action) is an effect that suggests a prize in the general winning opening (character A's appearance) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied (character A's action). By being composed of the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. Then, the appearance of the character and the action are related to the appearance of the character and the action by suggesting the winning to the general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied by a common object. It can increase the interest of the player.

The specific effect F (hold change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggers the determination that a predetermined condition is satisfied) that triggered the execution of the hold change effect (the effective start prize). The display result is announced by targeting each of the pending variable display games including the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game in which the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied) The display result may be announced. On the contrary, the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied) that triggered the execution of the hold change effect (finally, the start condition). The display result may be announced by targeting the variable display game excluding the variable display game in which is established.

(Character erasure process)
Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (hold change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least the first general winning openings 9050A to No. 1). 4 The history of one or more winnings to the general winning opening 9050D and the history of one or more winnings to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 75). Reset condition).

Further, if the displayed character is deleted after the lapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least) The first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 75).

FIG. 78 (A) is a timing chart showing a display period of each character when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is being executed, at the timing of (1), any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. NS.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing (2) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. During this period, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, but with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden and is continuously displayed. There is. If a valid start prize is generated within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A will be hidden after the action effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is hidden at the timing (3) when 2 minutes have passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, and further, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, but the variable display 1 ends, the variable display 2 starts, and the variable display 2 starts. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the effective start prize is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the action effect is completed.

When the displayed character is character C, the character C is hidden at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. In this example, since the effective start prize is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden, and the action is performed. At the timing of the end of the production (5), the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and further, the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts, but it is variable. With the end of display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden. It is displayed continuously.

In this way, once the character is displayed, it will continue to be displayed until "a predetermined condition is satisfied" or "a predetermined period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition". ing. Then, the character is hidden at the earlier timing of "the predetermined condition is satisfied" and "the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied".

[48th production form]
In the 48th effect mode shown in FIG. 75, the character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed. Based on this, the dialogue corresponding to the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game of the variable pattern accompanied by the reach state) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as that of the 47th effect mode, but the predetermined condition to be satisfied within the display period of the character and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific production G (variation result notice production))
In the 48th effect mode shown in FIG. 75, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905 and the reach state is established, the character displayed as the specific effect G is displayed. A variable result notice effect accompanied by dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is executed and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state reaches a predetermined timing for establishing the reach state, the reach state is established. It is possible to grasp and execute the specific effect G if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 77 shows a specific example of the variation result advance notice effect in the 48th effect form.

In FIG. 77 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 decides to make the character B appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A (see FIG. 73). In FIG. 77 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character 903100 (character B) holding the cane 903101 on the image display device 905. Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general prize.

Then, in FIG. 77 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "2" on the left, "1" on the right, and "3" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

Then, it is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined conditions are satisfied within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 77 (e), the character 3050 of "reach!" Is displayed at the upper part of the screen as the reach state is established. The effect control CPU 90120, which has detected the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines the dialogue of the character B.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbol being executed is determined to be a jackpot combination or a loss combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern specification command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is the variation pattern specification command for big hits or the variation pattern specification command for loss. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), when it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a jackpot combination, the character displaying the line "chance!" At a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it horizontally, and it is decided to display the line of "Fahrenheit !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, if it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a lost combination, it is decided that the line of "chance!" Is displayed next to the character being displayed at a rate of 90%. It is decided to display the line of "Intense heat !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of%.

In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line of "super heat !!" next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 produces an effect in which the character 903100 (character B) swings up the cane 903101 and emits the line 903102 of "heat !!". To execute. When the dialogue 903102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the character 903100 (character B) holding the wand 903101 and the dialogue 903102 uttered from the character 903100 are deleted from the screen.

As a result, for the player, the dialogue of the character 903100 (character B) that appears based on the winning of the general winning opening may result in the final stop display of the decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination as a result of the reach effect. You can grasp that it is expensive.

In this way, is the reach state established during the character display period by executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) triggered by "the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed"? It is possible to make people interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest from the time when the game ball wins the general prize opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. In addition, with the event of winning a prize in the general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the display result of the variable display game for which the display result has not yet been derived and displayed is announced, and the game is played in the general winning opening. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the time the ball wins until the specific production is executed. In addition, the dialogue of the character 903000 (character A) can be noticed, and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

In addition, a common object is an effect that suggests winning a prize in the general winning opening (appearance of character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of a variable display game in which the display result is not derived and displayed (character B's dialogue). By being composed of (character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. Then, the winning of the general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game that has not been confirmed are suggested by a common object, so that the player's appearance and dialogue regarding the appearance of the character You can increase your interest.

In the 48th effect mode, the specific effect G in which the character utters a predetermined line is executed when the reach state is established, that is, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined mode. The specific effect G may be executed not only in such a form but also when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, for example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed, a predetermined advance notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up advance notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed. The specific effect G may be executed.

Further, in the 48th effect mode, an example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is described regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol executed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is in a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball wins in the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol executed at the time of this is in the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is executed).

(Character erasure process)
Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect D and the specific effect F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (at least the first general winning openings 9050A to No. 1). 4 The general winning opening 9050D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 75).

Further, if the displayed character is deleted after the lapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (at least) The first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 75).

FIG. 78 (B) is a timing chart showing a display period of each character when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4, and the reach effect is executed only in the variable display 4 in the reach state. Shall hold. When the variable display 1 is being executed, at the timing of (11), any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. NS.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing (12) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the reach state is established within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the dialogue display effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is hidden at the timing (13) when 2 minutes have passed since the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the dialogue display effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is hidden at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, since the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden. During this period, the character C is hidden when the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It should not be displayed continuously.

[49th production form]
In the 47th effect mode and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of characters A to C is displayed. However, only when a character of a specific type is displayed, a specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

For example, in the 49th effect mode shown in FIG. 75, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed based on the occurrence of the effective start prize within the period in which either the character A or B is displayed. Even if a valid start prize is generated within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is not executed. Further, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within the period of time, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed.

In this way, the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect to be executed according to the type of the displayed character, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening, and the predetermined conditions The type of specific effect executed based on the establishment may be different.

Although the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect to be executed are common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific condition to be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the displayed character. The type of production may be different. For example, if a valid start prize is generated within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed). However, if a valid start prize occurs within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (hold change effect) is not executed). You may.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect differ depending on the type of the displayed character, but it is executed when the corresponding predetermined conditions are satisfied regardless of the type of the displayed character. The types of specific effects may be the same. For example, if a valid start prize occurs within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established within that period, it is specified. Although the effect F is not executed), the specific effect F (pending change effect) is executed even if the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed (a valid start prize is tentatively generated within that period). However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

In addition, if an effective start prize is generated before the establishment of (1) reach state within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action is performed. After executing, the character is erased, and (2) if the reach state is established before the effective start prize, the character is displayed after executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) in which the displayed character utters a line. You may want to erase it. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition that is satisfied earlier among the plurality of predetermined conditions is set. The specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

In addition, if an effective start prize is generated before the establishment of (1) reach state within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action is performed. The character is deleted after execution, and (2) even if the reach state is established before the effective start prize, the character is deleted after executing the specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action. You may try to do it. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied, a specific effect is performed. You may want to do it.

[Modifications of the 47th production form to the 49th production form]
In the example of FIG. 74, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined specific period after the character is displayed, the character is deleted before the end of the specific period. However, the character is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the end of the specific period even after the specific effect is executed. good.

In such a form, the specific effect may be executed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period in which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on the winning of the general winning opening, the character C does not disappear from the screen and continues for 5 minutes when the character C is displayed even if the valid start winning is generated. Is displayed, and the specific effect F (hold change effect) may be executed every time a valid start prize is generated in the 5 minutes.

In the example of FIG. 74, an example in which the display period of the character is a predetermined fixed period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described, but the display period of the character is not limited to such a form, for example. , The period until the variable display game executed a predetermined number of times is executed, or the period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed ends, and the character is displayed. It may be the period until the end of the game state (for example, the normal state, the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the big hit game state).

Further, regardless of the display period, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, once such a character is displayed, the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

Further, the display period of the character may be determined before the type of the character to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which of 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes the character display period is to be determined. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If, if character B is selected at a rate of 70%, character A is selected at a rate of 15%, character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, then the character C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, a different display period may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won, or depending on the game state.

Further, the predetermined conditions to be established in order to make the specific effect feasible are not limited to the above-mentioned effective start winning prize and the establishment of the reach state, but also the occurrence of a big hit game state, a predetermined type of big hit game state (for example, a probability variation big hit, or Occurrence of a jackpot with the largest number of rounds), the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, and the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = probability change state or time reduction after the end of the jackpot game state) The number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled by the state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the jackpot game state, the control to a predetermined game state (for example, a probability change state), and the display result are a loss combination. Others such as that the variable display game has been played a predetermined number of times, that the variable display game of the variable pattern of "non-reach" ("loss without reach") has been played a predetermined number of times, that the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, etc. Any condition may be used as long as it is a condition, that is, a condition that is satisfied with the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol (the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) such as the period during which the jackpot game state is controlled is executed. It may be performed during a period that has not been done.

In the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect form, an example is shown in which the notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect. Not limited to, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, an effect of only voice is executed, or an effect of voice and movable accessory 901000 is executed. It may be a pre-reading advance notice effect in which the ratio of the sound is different, or it may be a chance eye advance notice effect as shown in the 50th effect form or the 51st effect form described later.
Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display number of times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice.

In the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect mode, after the character is displayed in the general winning opening based on the winning of the game ball, the effective start winning is generated, so that the displayed character is the mode of the hold information. An example of executing a hold change effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a start winning judgment corresponding to each held variable display game is made. If there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state by checking the result specification command and the variation pattern judgment result specification command at the time of starting prize, the rate is higher than when it does not exist. The character may be made to appear. Further, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate at which a specific character appears may be higher than in the case where it does not exist. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and a case where the display result does not exist. Then, when a valid start prize is generated after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character executes a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

Further, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, when the character is controlled to the jackpot game state, the displayed character is erased, and the game ball is placed in the general winning opening during the period controlled to the jackpot game state. Even if the character wins a prize, the specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, in-round effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state, and these various effects are not disturbed. be able to.

In the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, an example in which a specific effect is always executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period has been described, but the display of the character is not limited to such a form. Even if a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. For example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 50%. Is executed, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%. The execution ratio may be different.

Here, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect form, when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening while the character is displayed, the display of the new character based on the winning in the general winning opening is displayed. Instead, the characters that have already been displayed shall be displayed continuously.
That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence / absence of character display and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. 73, provided that none of the characters is displayed when the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is assumed that the character is displayed based on the determination.

Not limited to this form, if a character is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed is replaced (already displayed). The character may be deleted), and the character based on the later general prize may be displayed.

Also, comparing the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed with the display period of the character based on the later general prize, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is larger. If it is long, it will continue to be displayed, and the character based on the later general prize will not be displayed. If the display period of the character based on the later general prize is longer, it will replace the character based on the earlier general prize (already). The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the later general prize may be displayed.

In such a form, when the character based on the later general prize is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (the character already displayed is deleted), the display period of the character based on the later general prize is displayed. The remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed may be added (the period in which both are added is defined as the display period of the newly displayed character).

Further, in the 47th production form to the 49th production form, if a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening within the character display period, a new character is not displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. , The remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed may be extended. The period to be extended here (time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if the character A is displayed) specified for the already displayed character. Further, even when a prize is entered in the general winning opening within the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 73, and the determined character (however, newly displayed) is displayed. The display period (for example, 2 minutes for character B) according to the character that is not removed may be added to the remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, if a character is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without erasing the already displayed character) is displayed later. Characters based on the general prize may also be displayed.
For example, if a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening when character A is displayed and it is determined that character B is newly displayed, a new character is added to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 905.

In such a form, the period obtained by adding the display period of the character based on the later general prize to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is set as the common display period of both characters. You may. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed and either one character or both characters are deleted. Further, if the common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined conditions, both characters are deleted.

Further, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 905, the first predetermined condition (for example, effective) corresponding to the first character is first obtained. When the start prize) is established and the first specific effect (for example, the specific effect F (hold change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is erased and only the second character is displayed. The displayed state is reached, and then the second predetermined condition (for example, the reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result)) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is satisfied. When the advance notice effect)) is executed, the second character may also be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be characters of the same type.

In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be common conditions (for example, the occurrence of a valid start prize), and in that case, both the first character and the second character are used. In the state displayed on the image display device 905, the first specific effect by the first character and the second identification by the second character are based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a valid start prize only once). Both of the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, specific effect F (hold change effect)), in which case both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is satisfied in the state displayed on the 905, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is executed, and the first When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then the second predetermined condition (for example, the reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, the same type of specific effect (specific effect F (specific effect F)) is satisfied again. The hold change effect)) may be executed so that the second character is erased.

Further, as in the 49th effect mode, if the first character (character A or B) is displayed during the period, the first specific effect (specific effect) is obtained according to the establishment of the first condition (generation of effective start winning). F) can be executed, and the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed according to the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) during the period when the second character (character C) is displayed. It is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed at the same time). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character when the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed. It shall be displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is decided to display the second character based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is deleted and the second character is deleted. Shall be newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control to display the first character instead of the second character is not performed.

On the other hand, when the configuration is such that the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the satisfaction of the first condition, and the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are intended for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are variable result advance notice effects of the same variable display game and reach. (When it is executed immediately after the establishment of the state), the second specific effect shall be executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect shall not be executed.

[50th production form]
In the 50th production mode shown in FIG. 79, a button icon 904000 is newly displayed on the image display device 905 (see FIG. 80, etc.) every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and the displayed button icon 904000 is displayed. The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the number of. Here, each of the specific effects in the present effect form prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect capable of predicting the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's movement. There are three types of specific effects: cut-in notice effect (specific effect H), pseudo-continuous notice effect (specific effect I), and chance eye notice effect (specific effect J).

The display information condition of FIG. 79 is the number of button icons 904000 displayed in order to execute each specific effect, and if at least the number of button icons 904000 shown in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific condition is specified. No production is performed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the chance eye notice effect is If the button icon 904000 is not displayed 3 or more, it will not be executed.

The button icon 904000 displayed on the image display device 905 is incremented by 1 each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 905. Suppose there is. Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 904000 displayed for executing the specific effect from the number of button icons 904000 displayed before the specific effect is executed is displayed. It will be displayed on the image display device 905 after the execution of the specific effect. For example, if (1) the cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed while the five button icons 904000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed will be displayed. The number of displays of 4000 becomes 4, and (2) when the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 2) is executed, the number of displayed 4000 button icons after the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed becomes 3. , (3) When the chance eye notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of displayed button icons 4000 after the chance eye notice effect is executed becomes 2.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern by the content of the characters displayed on the screen after the reach state is established. As shown in FIG. 79, the cut-in notice effect is obtained when (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed and (2) a variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined continuous striking operation, and (3) the player can perform the predetermined continuous striking operation.

If the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state while no button icon 904000 is displayed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice is given. No production is performed. Further, in the variable display game of the variable pattern that does not accompany the reach state, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed, and then the player operates the operation button 9030 a plurality of times, so that the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed according to the variable pattern to be played. A specific mode of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 80.

In FIG. 80 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored in hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the first button icon 904000 on the left edge of the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 80B, the screen is updated from the state in which the button icon 904000 is not displayed to the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed. In addition, with the display of one or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is that (1) a variable display game of a variation pattern accompanied by a reach state is executed while (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed.

Then, in FIG. 80 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "4" on the left, "2" on the right, and "8" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game, the game control microcomputer. Confirm based on the fluctuation pattern specification command received from 90100. Then, when the variable display game to be started has a reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 80 (e). Then, based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 80 (f), the characters "continuous hit!", A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 9030 are imitated in order from the top in the center of the screen. The image and the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 composed of a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid are displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 should be continuously performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 erases one button icon 904000 required for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 along with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. As a result, the number of the displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is deleted from the screen as the specific effect that can be executed no longer exists.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 continuously presses the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 90120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time since the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 is displayed. When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and it is assumed that the time bar is decremented by 1 stage every 1 second after the display. In the effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. 80 (g), the operation buttons 9030 are pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 of the 5 stages (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined, and the cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 905.

Specifically, when the effect control CPU 90120 satisfies the continuous hit suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 80 (h), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed becomes the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination. Decided to display the characters "Chance!" At a rate of 20% and the characters "Fever !!" at a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a lost combination. In the case of the final stop symbol, it is decided to display the characters "chance!" At a rate of 80% and the characters "heat !!" at a rate of 20%.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a cut-in notice effect for displaying the screen including the determined characters on the image display device 905. In the example of FIG. 80 (i), the characters 904200 of "heat !!" are displayed large on the entire screen.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100, the effect control CPU 90120 "chance!" And neither of the characters "super heat !!" shall be displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-ream notice production)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is a re-variation in which the decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped is scrolled up and down again in one variable display game, as if it were performed multiple times. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed continuously. When re-variation is performed, a pseudo-continuous symbol is used as a decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C according to each symbol stop operation of the player (composed of the characters "NEXT" in this example). Supposes that is temporarily stopped.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, (1) a variable display game was executed with a fluctuation pattern of 8 seconds or more while (1) two or more button icons 904000 were displayed. In this case, the player is notified to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can perform each predetermined symbol stop operation.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, the player operates the operation button 9030 three times within the period in which one variable display game is executed (each symbol stop operation is performed three times). It requires a certain operation time, and is conditioned on the execution of a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific mode of the pseudo-continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.

In FIG. 81 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored in hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

Further, one button icon 904000 is displayed at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The characters 904000a of "cut-in" indicating "the in-notice effect can be executed" are displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the second button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 81B, the screen is updated from the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed to the state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the display of two or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the characters 904000b of "pseudo-ream" indicating that "pseudo-ream notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" are added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is that (1) the variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern of 8 seconds or more in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. be.

Then, in FIG. 81 (c), after the second button icon 904000 is displayed, it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "5" on the left, "1" on the right, and "7" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 receives from the game control microcomputer 90100 whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the fluctuation pattern specification command. Then, when the fluctuation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state, as shown in FIG. 81 (d). Determines to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (execute re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and decide not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (do not execute re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (re-variation is executed) with a probability of 100%.

When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L according to each symbol stop operation of the player, and the decorative symbol. , The decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R is determined, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C.

As described above, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command and the variable display result. The final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the notification command. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R according to each symbol stop operation of the player are determined and confirmed. It may be different from or the same as the "left" and "right" decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

When it is decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and the "right" decorative symbol according to each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 905R and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols constituting the determined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are oscillated and stopped, respectively. Decide on that. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is decided to swing and stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

In this way, when the presence / absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for performing re-variation are determined, as shown in FIG. 81 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in the non-display mode. With the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 81 (f), the characters "press!", The downward arrow, and the operation button 9030 are moved to the "left" decorative pattern display area 905L in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of the imitated image is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 erases two button icons 904000 required for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 along with the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and the characters 904000a of "cut-in" and the characters 904000b of "pseudo-ream" are deleted from the screen as the specific effect that can be executed does not exist.

"Left" decoration As shown in FIG. 81 (g), the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the symbol display area 905L presses the operation button 9030 to display the "left" decoration. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905L. The rocking stop is a state in which the decorative design is not scrolled in the vertical direction, but is not completely stopped and is swinging (the final stop is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol that is oscillated and stopped is a "left" decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it is decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, and is a pseudo. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbol, it is a "left" decorative symbol that constitutes a combination of a predetermined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

When the "left" decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R, as shown in FIG. 81 (g). .. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R.

"Right" decoration As shown in FIG. 81 (h), the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the symbol display area 905R presses the operation button 9030 to display the "right" decoration. The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905R. Here, the decorative symbol that is oscillated and stopped is a "right" decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it is decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, and is a pseudo. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbol, it is a "right" decorative symbol that constitutes a combination of a predetermined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

When the "right" decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, as shown in FIG. 81 (h). .. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-sequential characters based on the table of FIG. 81 (d), it is "middle" as shown in FIG. 82 (i). In the decorative symbol display area 905C of the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the characters "NEXT" is stopped swinging. As a result, a predetermined combination of "left", "middle", and "right" temporary stop symbols is displayed as temporary stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (j), after the temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative symbol changes (for example,) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". (Scroll display in the vertical direction) is restarted. After the re-variation, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is displayed as the final stop in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the decorative symbols are variably displayed. The display result of the game will be confirmed.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90120 has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-linkage symbol based on the table of FIG. 81 (d), as shown in FIG. 82 (k), it is "medium". The "middle" decorative symbol constituting the combination of the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) determined in advance in the decorative symbol display area 905C is oscillated and stopped. As a result, the combination of the predetermined "left", "right", and "middle" fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is oscillated and stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (l), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed.

The effect control CPU 90120 has determined to temporarily stop the pseudo-linkage symbol even if the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. In this case, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-variation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols is automatically displayed as a temporary stop even if the operation is not performed, and the re-variation is executed. And.

In this example, when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the operation suggestion condition that the variable display game is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied. The operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by a reach state (that is, regardless of the effect mode of the specified fluctuation pattern), but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state becomes a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is out of order. It is good to set it to.

Further, when the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is preset for each fluctuation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 90100 side, that is, by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. In a case where the pseudo-continuous symbol is specified to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol while displaying two or more button icons 904000. The operation suggestion condition may be that the variable pattern specification command is received (the variable display game is executed by the variable pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous notice effect), regardless of the specified variable pattern as in the above-mentioned example. , The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or more.

(Chance notice production)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the look-ahead advance notice. By displaying the chance eye, which is the display result, at the final stop, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game, which is the target of the pre-reading notice.

In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols is finally stopped and displayed in the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C, and "left" is displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R. By displaying an even-numbered decorative symbol that is one larger than the odd-numbered decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C of the "middle", the "left", "middle", and "middle" that are the chances are displayed. The combination of "right" decorative patterns shall be completed.

That is, the combination of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols that is the chance in this example is any one of "112", "334", "556", and "778". It is possible to display the final stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that is a chance eye according to the player's operation to stop all symbols.

As shown in FIG. 79, the chance eye notice effect is as follows: (1) 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is held, and the variable display game is held. When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is accompanied by a reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all symbol stop operation. It becomes feasible by doing.

In addition, in the chance eye notice production, in one variable display game, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 9030 only once. It will be stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice production in which each symbol stop operation for swinging and stopping each of the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols is required three times in one variable display game. The operation required in one variable display game (all symbol stop operation) is only once. A specific mode of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84.

In FIG. 83 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored in hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 3. At this time, in the start winning prize memory display area 905H, each display part (left end, second from left, and 3 from left) corresponding to 3 variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. It is assumed that each of the second) is displayed in the normal mode.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the start winning command determination command for the second special drawing. Checking the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (display part at the left end) where the start condition is first satisfied among the three pending variable display games. Is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (second display part from the left) where the start condition is satisfied is the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied third. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won a plurality of times (at least twice or more) in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, two button icons 904000 are displayed at the left end of the screen, and "predetermined". The character 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied" and "the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied". The character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" indicating is displayed.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays a third button icon 904000 on the left edge of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 83B, the screen is updated from the state in which the two button icons 904000 are displayed to the state in which the three button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the display of three or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000c of "chance eye" indicating that "the chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game accompanied by a reach state is held, and the variable display game is held. None of the variable display games run before is accompanied by a reach state.

Then, in FIG. 83 (c), it is assumed that after the third button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "5" on the left, "9" in the middle, and "6" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a non-reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state, based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Of the two pending variable display games, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (leftmost display part) for which the start condition is satisfied first is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (second display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the chance eye notice effect is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 is executed twice before the held variable display game of the reach variation pattern (including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). For each of the variable display games), it is determined to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether the display result of the held variable display game of the reach variation pattern is a jackpot combination or a loss combination is determined by the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game or the start winning variation pattern. Confirm based on the judgment result specification command.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), when the display result of the held variable display game of the reach variation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. Depending on the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eye (loss combination other than the chance eye) at a rate of 25%, and the pending reach fluctuation pattern is variable. If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% according to the player's operation to stop all symbols. Decide to stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

When it is decided to stop the chance number, the effect control CPU 90120 constitutes the chance number according to the player's operation to stop all the symbols, and the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 905L. And an odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 905C, and an even number of decorative symbols to be stopped swinging in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R are determined.

When it is decided not to stop the chance eyes, the effect control CPU 90120 has a "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and a "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C according to the player's all symbol stop operation. In the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R, the decorative symbols that make up the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance are swung according to the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. Decide to stop.
That is, it is decided to swing and stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is a non-chance eye, in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols.

In this way, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol when the chance eye stop is performed are determined, as shown in FIG. 83 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display part from the left is the non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), the characters "Stop all symbols!" 904200 are displayed in large size in the center of the screen, and the characters "Press!" Are displayed downward in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of the arrow and the image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". do. In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect described above, by operating the operation button 9030 only once, all the decorative symbol display areas 905L of "left", "middle", and "right", The decorative design is stopped at 905C and 905R.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is accompanied by the display of the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050, and among the displayed button icons 904000, the three buttons required to execute the chance eye advance notice effect. Erase the icon 904000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and as there is no specific effect that can be executed, the characters "cut-in" 904000a, the characters "pseudo-ren" 904000b, and the "chance eye" Character 904000c is erased from the screen.

Next, the player who recognizes the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 shall perform the operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to stop the non-chance eye based on the table of FIG. 83 (d), as shown in FIG. 83 (g), "left", In the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that does not become a chance is shaken according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (h), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed. Here, as a non-chance-eye confirmed decorative symbol, a combination of "4" on the left, "9" in the middle, and "7" on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 is a player. When it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to the stop operation of all the symbols, the fixed decorative symbol that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (final stop symbol) The combination of is oscillated and stopped.

Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the player is required to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, and the start condition of the next variable display game is set. Even when it is established, it is determined whether or not there is a chance stop as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 84 (i), when the display result of the held variable display game of the reach variation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. Depending on the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eyes at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eyes at a rate of 25%, and the display result of the variable display game of the held reach fluctuation pattern is a loss combination In the case of, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% and the non-chance eye at a rate of 75% according to the player's operation to stop all symbols. Decide to stop.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 operates to stop all symbols of the player when it is decided to stop the chance eyes or when it is decided to stop the non-chance eyes, as in the previous variable display game. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped swinging is determined according to the above.

In this way, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol when the chance eye stop is performed are determined, as shown in FIG. 84 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there is only one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is the non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 84 (k), the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 are displayed in the center of the screen. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". do.

Next, the player who recognizes the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 shall perform the operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to stop the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 84 (i), as shown in FIG. 84 (l), "left", " In the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the combination of decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eye is oscillated and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (m), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the final stop of the decorative symbols (final stop) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed. Here, as a definite decorative symbol for the chance eye, a combination of "1" on the left, "1" in the middle, and "2" on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 is a player. Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to the stop operation of all the symbols, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. The combination of symbols) shall be stopped swinging.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 is determined to require the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye advance notice effect. Therefore, when the start condition of the next variable display game is satisfied, whether or not the chance is stopped is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 84 (o).

In the 50th effect mode described above, the cut-in advance notice effect, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, and the chance eye advance notice effect all have a state after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 904000. In the displayed state, it can be executed by the operation of the player according to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on condition that the player operates the game ball after the game ball has won the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

Further, each time the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the button icon 904000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can play the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that the prize was won.

Further, if the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied while one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, a notification prompting a continuous hit operation is issued as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is satisfied in the state of being set, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation is sent as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and a chance eye is displayed when 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the advance notice effect is satisfied, a notification prompting the stop operation of all symbols is given as an operation corresponding to the chance eye advance notice effect, so that the player can execute the specific effect by performing what kind of operation. Can be grasped.

Further, according to the number of displayed button icons 904000, when the number of displays is 1 or more, the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed, and when the number of displays is 2 or more, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" is displayed and the number of displays. When is 3 or more, the character 904000c of the "chance eye" is displayed, so that the player can grasp the type of the specific effect that can be executed according to the number of the displayed button icons 904000. As a result, it is possible to be interested in the number of winning balls of the game ball to the general winning opening.

It should be noted that the type of specific effect that can be executed and the operation required to execute the specific effect may be notified. For example, according to the number of displayed button icons 904000, when the number of displays is 1 or more, the character "continuous hit" is displayed next to the character 904000a of "cut-in", and when the number of displays is 2 or more, the character "pseudo-ream" is displayed. The character "Stop each symbol" is displayed next to the character 904000b, and when the number of displays is 3 or more, the character "Stop all symbols" is displayed next to the character 904000c of "Chance eye", so that the player can It is possible to grasp the operations required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, there is a case where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 8. It may take more than a second. In this case, a notification prompting a continuous hit operation for executing the cut-in notice effect (display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100) and a stop operation for each symbol for executing the pseudo continuous notice effect are urged. The question is which of the notifications (display of the operation suggestion information 904050 in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R) should be performed. In this embodiment, the one with the larger number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect is preferentially executed.
Therefore, the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (two or more button icons 904000 are required) is the notification prompting the continuous hit operation for executing the cut-in advance notice effect (one or more button icon 904000 is required). It shall be given priority over.

Further, in the state where 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and , The pending variable display game may have a reach variation pattern. In this case, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R). Operation suggestion information 904050 display) or notification prompting all symbol stop operation for executing chance eye notice effect (display of characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And operation suggestion information 904050 in each variable display game). The question is whether to do. In this case, the notification prompting the stop operation of all symbols for executing the chance eye advance notice effect (3 or more button icons 904000 are required) is the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (button icon 904000). 2 or more is required).

Further, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 904000 is the number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect (1 for cut-in notice effect, 2, 2 chance for pseudo-continuous notice effect). If there are more than 3) in the case of the eye notice effect, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of button icons 904000 initially displayed is the specific. It will continue to be displayed even after the production is executed.

For example, if the chance eye notice effect is executed while four or more button icons 904000 are displayed, one button icon 904000 that is continuously displayed remains even after the chance eye notice effect is executed. The "cut-in" character 904000a remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied, and the notification for prompting the continuous hit operation is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is satisfied (the number of button icons 904000 is confirmed). (I try to check the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game together with), but it is not limited to this form, and when the variable display game is being executed, is the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect satisfied? It may be determined whether or not. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if they are displayed, the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for causing repeated hits is provided. It may be displayed. Further, in the effect control CPU 90120, whether or not two or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivative display of the display result) reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). If it is displayed, the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 holds a variable display game (including a variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize) with a reach state at the timing when the effective start prize is generated, and the variable display game thereof. When none of the variable display games executed before is accompanied by a reach state, it is determined whether or not 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and if they are displayed, all symbol stop operations are performed. The characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 may be displayed. That is, in the variable display game executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined predetermined number (without waiting for the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next), a predetermined number is specified. Notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed has a reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for performing the continuous hit may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (deriving display of the display result) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining), and if it is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivative display of the display result) is the predetermined time (for example). At the timing when the remaining 10 seconds), the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 provides a variable display game with a reach state (a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. (Including) is pending, and it is determined whether or not any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is not accompanied by a reach state, and a variable display game with a reach state is determined. Is held and none of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is accompanied by a reach state, the all symbol stop operation is performed in the variable display game being executed. The characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 may be displayed. That is, in the variable display game executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined predetermined number (without waiting for the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next), a predetermined number is specified. Notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Further, in the 50th effect mode, the operation suggestion conditions for notifying the user to perform a predetermined operation (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) are all conditions related to the variable display game (display mode and (Fluctuating time), and an example in which a specific effect is executed during execution of a variable display game due to a predetermined operation has been described. However, the operation suggestion condition is, for example, a big hit, not limited to such a form. It may be a condition related to the game state (for example, whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state, whether or not the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is more than a predetermined number, etc.), and it may be a big hit. A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the game state. For example, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled by the jackpot game state, a notification is given to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. Occasionally, an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot or whether or not the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state is greater than a predetermined number may be executed. Further, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state (however, the effect mode is set in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the probabilistic state is). A notification may be given to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect of notifying whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state may be executed.

Further, in the 50th effect mode, even when the number of displayed button icons 904000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous striking operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous striking operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and unless the number of displayed button icons 904000 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), a notification prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example,). No notification is performed to prompt any of the continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operation), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, any of the cut-in advance notice effect, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, and the chance eye advance notice effect). The specific effect of is not executed either).

(Example of one notification)
Further, in the 50th effect mode, in order to stop the temporary stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, three operations are performed for each area, but the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is performed. ) May be stopped in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, so that the operation may be performed three times for each area. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L, and the operation button 9030 is displayed. The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is oscillated and stopped in response to the operation of, then the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905R of the "right", and the final stop is made in response to the operation of the operation button 9030. The right symbol constituting the symbol is oscillated and stopped, and finally, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905C of the "middle", and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol is formed according to the operation of the operation button 9030. May be oscillated and stopped. In such a configuration, when the combination of jackpot symbols becomes the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 905L, 905R, and "left", "right", and "middle" are displayed according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative symbol on the 905C, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the operation.

In the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas, a combination of special decorative symbols that is different from the combination of normal decorative symbols (for example, images of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8") is placed. By stopping, a notification is given to the player to urge a predetermined operation, and depending on the player's predetermined operation, whether the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or a miss (or a probabilistic big hit). It may be possible to execute a specific effect that notifies (whether it becomes a non-probability change jackpot, etc.). For example, a special decorative symbol that is an image imitating the operation button 9030 is stopped in the "left" and "right" symbol display areas (or a normal decoration is displayed in the "left" and "right" symbol display areas, respectively. Stop the symbol), and stop the image of the characters "Continuous hit!" In the "Medium" symbol display area. Then, when the player who recognizes the image of the character "continuous hit!" Performs the continuous hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character "big hit!" Or "loss" is displayed on the image display device 905. An image of the characters "" may be displayed.

In addition, in such a form, according to the image of the character stopped in the "middle" symbol display area (according to the notification mode suggesting to perform a predetermined operation), the variable display game The rate at which the displayed result becomes a big hit (or the rate at which a probable variable big hit) may be different. For example, in the "middle" symbol display area, the operation button 9030 is made longer than when the image of the characters "continuous hit!", Which suggests that the operation button 9030 is pressed repeatedly for a short time, is stopped as a special symbol. The rate at which the display result becomes a big hit may be higher when the image of the character "long press!", Which suggests the operation of pressing once, is stopped as a special symbol. In this way, the effect of notifying the display result of the variable display game according to the operation of the player may be executed as a specific effect without going through the reach state. It should be noted that, within the period in which the variable display game of 1 is being executed, the combination of special decorative symbols is stopped multiple times in the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas, so that the special decorative symbol combination is stopped multiple times. The player may perform a predetermined operation each time the combination of the above is stopped. In this case, a notice effect suggesting a display result may be executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. ..

In the 50th effect mode, each symbol stop operation is effective on condition that the general winning opening is won twice or more, and a pseudo continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation to enter the general winning opening. An example is shown in which the all-symbol stop operation is effective on condition that the prize is won three times or more, and the chance eye notice effect is executed according to the all-symbol stop operation. The condition that the operation is valid) may be a condition that the general winning opening is won four or more times.

[51st production form]
In the 51st effect mode shown in FIG. 79, unlike the 50th effect mode, the specific effect that can be executed differs depending on the gaming state. In the 51st effect mode, the cut-in notice effect that requires a continuous striking operation can be executed in any of the normal state, the probability change state, and the time saving state. On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the game state is in the normal state, and the chance eye advance notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. It can be executed only when.

In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, the pseudo-continuous notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed. Each symbol stop operation for this purpose is prompted with priority. On the other hand, since the game states that can be executed differ between the pseudo continuous advance notice effect and the chance eye advance notice effect, the operation suggestion condition is not satisfied at the same time.

Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the normal state is 3 or more, the character 904000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo-ream" are not executed in the normal state because the chance eye notice effect is not executed. Character 904000b is displayed, but the character 904000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state is 3 or more, the character "cut-in" is not executed in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state because the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed. The characters 904000a and the "chance eye" character 904000c are displayed, but the character 904000b of the "pseudo-ren" is not displayed.

In this way, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed differs depending on the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, so that the specific effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state. It is possible to make different interests.

In this production mode, the advance notice production that requires a larger number of button icons 904000 is preferentially executed. It may be executed with priority. For example, if the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect and the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect are satisfied for the same variable display game, the notice effect with a higher rate of big hit (for example, the pseudo-continuous notice effect). ) Should be prioritized for execution.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect mode shown in FIG. 85, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 904000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether or not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c for each prize, and when displaying, the character 904000a of "cut-in", the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren", and the character 904000c of "chance eye" It determines which of the above is displayed. In FIG. 86 (A), whether or not any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed according to the winning of each general winning opening, and when displaying, which of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed. The display information judgment table for determining is shown.

When the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A, the effect control CPU 90120 decides to display the character 904000a of "cut-in" on the screen at a rate of 25%, and "cut-in" at a rate of 75%. It is decided to display the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" on the screen. In addition, when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, it is decided that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" on the screen at a rate of 25%.

In addition, when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C, it is decided that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a game ball wins in the 4th general winning opening 9050D, it is decided that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 70%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 20%.

Then, as in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect form described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in the state where the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed, the continuous striking operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed according to the repeated hitting operation, and a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state where the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" is displayed. In that case, a notification is given to perform each symbol stop operation, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the reach fluctuation pattern is variable in a state where the character 904000c of "chance eye" is displayed. If the display game is on hold and all the variable display games executed before that have a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the player is notified to perform the all symbol stop operation, and the all symbol stop operation is performed in response to the all symbol stop operation. Perform a chance eye notice production.

In the example of FIG. 86 (A), when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the game ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 9050B. If a prize is won, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and if a game ball wins a prize at the third general winning opening 9050C, any one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. Then, when a game ball wins a prize in the fourth general winning opening 50C, any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

In this way, depending on the general winning opening where the game ball wins, the ratio of notifying the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio of the specific effect that can be executed are different. It is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the game.

Further, the game ball launched in the left game area 9010A is easier to win in the second general winning opening 9050B than in the first general winning opening 9050A, and the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B is easier to win in the fourth general winning opening 9010B. If it is configured so that it is easier to win the third general winning opening 9050C than the 9050D, it is more difficult to win the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A in the normal state, if it is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state). When a game ball wins a prize in the 4th general winning opening 9050D), the ratio of the specific effect being executed is high.

Further, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" may be displayed. However, the character 904000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D, either the character "cut-in" 904000a or the character "chance eye" 904000c may be displayed. However, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" is not displayed.

In this way, the game ball enters any of the general winning openings because the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed differ depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

Further, when the game state is the normal state, the game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A, and when the game state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the game ball is fired in the right game area 9010B. In the normal state in which the game ball wins in the 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, the characters 904000a to 904000c are more than in the probabilistic state or the time saving state in which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The ratio of displaying any of the above is high, and the ratio of executing the specific effect is high.

Since the interest is likely to decline when the game state is in the normal state, the decline in interest is prevented by increasing the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the player is interested in the special figure game or the normal figure game. Since there are cases where it interferes with the above, the ratio of characters 904000a to 904000c appearing and the ratio of executing a specific effect are set to be lower than in the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately different the interests of winning a game ball in the general winning opening according to the game state.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 86 (A), when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the ratio of characters 904000a to 904000c appearing and the specific effect are executed as compared with the case where the gaming state is in the normal state. The ratio may be increased, and contrary to the example shown in FIG. 86 (A), when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first general winning opening is won. The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the mouth 9050A or the second general winning mouth 9050B. Further, in FIG. 86 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only when the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won, but similarly, the third general winning opening 9050C Alternatively, a specific effect that can be executed only when the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won may be provided.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 86 (A), as shown in FIG. 86 (B), a game ball is won for each winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the game state is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are higher than when the game state when the game ball wins is the probability change state or the time saving state. May be made higher. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 86 (B), when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the normal state. Characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than that. Further, in FIG. 86B, a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is in the normal state may be provided, and a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state may be provided. May be provided.

It should be noted that the rate of displaying characters 904000a to 904000c and the rate of executing a specific effect are not limited to different cases depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probabilistic state, or the time saving state. For example, whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, and the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = end of the jackpot game state). Whether or not the number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled later in the probabilistic state or the time saving state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, and whether or not the variable display game in which the display result is a loss combination has continued for a predetermined number of times, "Non- Variable display of variation pattern of "reach" ("loss without reach") Character 904000a ~ The ratio at which 904000c is displayed and the ratio at which the specific effect is executed may be different.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 905]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of the image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is defined as (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is defined as (Y + 1) pixels. Then, the coordinates of the pixels in the upper left corner of the display screen are set to (0,0), and the coordinates of the pixels in the lower right corner of the display screen are set to (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), the rectangular region defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as the vertices is defined as the first area α, and the coordinates (a + 1,0). The rectangular area defined by the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices is defined as the second area β. There is no overlapping region between the first area α and the second area β. Further, in this example, the second area β is a wider area than the first area α.

In the first area α, the number of prizes related to the number of prizes in each prize opening, such as the number of prizes in the general prize opening, the number of prizes in the first starting prize opening, and the number of prizes in the second starting winning slot, etc. Numerical information can be displayed. As shown in FIG. 87A, the second area β includes an error message display area 5E, a fourth symbol display area 905A, 905B, a decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, and a start winning memory display area 905H. Is provided. In the examples of FIGS. 87 and 88, the background image is visible in the second area β, but the background image is invisible in the first area α.

In this example, the overall image of the background image stored in the ROM 90121 as the effect data has an overall width of (X + 1) pixels as shown in (b) and (c) of FIGS. 89, which will be described later. This is an image in which the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. In the examples of FIGS. 87 (b) (c) and 88 (e) (f), the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0,0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]. Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [a rectangular area defined by the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is visible to the player. Of the entire area of the background image, the area corresponding to the first area α [the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] is invisible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 87 (b) (c) and 88 (e) (f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area is visible, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is invisible.

In the examples of FIGS. 87 (b) (c) and 88 (e) (f), "today's general prize number" which is the total number of prizes to the general prize opening on the day (1) in the first area α. And (2) "Today's navel prize number" which is the total number of prizes to the first start winning opening on the day, and (3) "Today's total number of prizes to the second starting prize opening on the day" Three items of "Electric chew winning number" are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the effect control CPU 90120, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening, a game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When a general winning opening designation command is received and a winning entry occurs in the starting winning opening, the starting winning is specified as to which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. Receive a mouth specification command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can individually total the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) "Today's general prizes" is 70, (2) "Today's navel prizes" is 521, and (3) "Today's electric chew prizes" is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the number of winnings in the starting winning opening in a contrastable manner, it is possible to relatively grasp the winning status of each winning opening.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 87 (b) and 88 (e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A, and is decorated. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Further, in the start winning prize memory display area 905H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to the hold of one special figure game. The image of the fourth symbol in the variable display, the image of the decorative symbol in the variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

It is assumed that the display layer of the fourth symbol, the display layer of the decorative symbol, and the display layer of the pending information are all higher than the display layer of the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when a certain image and another image are superimposed and displayed, the visibility of one image is changed to the visibility of another image. This means that display control is prioritized over gender. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 87 (b) (c) and 88 (e) (f), one of the area and the background image in which each image of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information is displayed. Although the part area overlaps, in this case, regarding the overlapping area, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the reserved information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (on the player side).

Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 88 (f), the area where the decorative symbol is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap, but in this case, the overlapping area The display control is performed so that the error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easy to see (including visible), while the decorative symbol is difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative pattern (on the player side).

As a display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β visible to the player in the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β in the entire background image is used as the background. It is set as the display layer of the image, and the area corresponding to the first area α in the entire area of the background image is not set as the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates (X,) in the background image). Image data of only [a rectangular area defined with Y) as a vertex] may be used).

Further, as another display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, the entire area of the background image is set in the display layer of the background image (that is,). The entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is the first in the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image. By setting another background image for winning number information (for example, a white and plain image) in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. It may be. In such a configuration, it is easy to see the image of the display layer below the display layer with a predetermined transmittance (for example, a white and plain image) for another background image for winning number information. , It becomes invisible when it is 0%), the image of the lower display layer may be visible, and by setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer The area corresponding to the first area α becomes visible, and the character E becomes visible.

Further, the display layer of the winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning number information does not deteriorate due to the display of other information in the first area α. Further, the display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message, and may be higher than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer of the winning number information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in the display area of other information (whether it is displayed in the first area α or the second area β). However, the visibility may not be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), since the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β, these images are displayed. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 905, the number of prizes to the general prize opening (“today's general prizes”) and the first start prize as the prize number information displayed in the first area α. The visibility of the number of winnings in the mouth (“Today's Heso winnings”) and the number of winnings in the second starting winnings (“Today's electric chew winnings”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

Then, when the image display device 905 is performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information, if a prize is given to the general winning opening, FIG. 87 ( As shown in d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command by the effect control CPU 90120 (“Today's general winning opening number”). Is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general prize opening while the fourth symbol is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the hold information is displayed, the general prize displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information do not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the general winning opening has been won and that the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol ends and the display result stops. At the same time, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends and the display result is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 905A remains lit (displayed) in a display color reminiscent of the detachment (the display result is stopped and displayed), and is used as a fixed decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the out-of-order symbols of "5, 3, 1" are stopped and displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the fourth symbol in which the stop display is displayed (in the state where the display result is derived and displayed) and the stop display are displayed (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of prizes displayed in the first area α may be displayed depending on that these images are displayed on the image display device 905. As information, the number of winnings to the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening ("Today's Heso winning number"), and the winning to the second starting winning opening The visibility of the number (“Today's number of winning electric chews”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Then, when the image display device 905 is performing the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol and a prize is generated in the general winning opening, as shown in FIG. 87 (d). Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“today's general winning number”) is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are being performed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is increased. , Updated without sacrificing visibility. That is, the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol do not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the general winning opening has been won and that the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

In the example of FIGS. 87 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility. Even when a prize is awarded, the first start winning opening is won regardless of the variable display and stop display of the 4th symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, as in the case of the general winning opening. The numbers are updated without disturbing visibility. In addition, when a prize is awarded to the second start winning opening, the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol are not applied, as in the case of the general winning opening. The number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility.

As shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f), when the effect control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection specification command that specifies that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (“Error occurred in this example” occurs in the image display device 905. The image of the characters "I did.") Is displayed.
As described above, the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the decorative symbol is variably displayed, or when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control CPU 90120 receives the abnormality detection designation command, the area where the decorative symbol is displayed and an error occur. With respect to the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, the display control is performed so that the error message is easy to see (including visible) and the decorative pattern is difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 88 (f), when viewed from the player, the error message is in front of the decorative symbol in the variable display (or the decorative symbol in the stopped display state) (on the player side). It looks like it is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 88 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the error message may be displayed in the image display device 905 in the first area α. The number of winnings to the general winning opening ("Today's general winnings"), the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening ("Today's Heso winnings"), and the number of winnings displayed in 2 The visibility of the number of winnings to the starting winning opening (“Today's number of winnings for electric chews”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

Then, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the error message is being displayed on the image display device 905, the effect control CPU 90120 wins the general prize as shown in FIG. 88 (g). Based on the reception of the mouth designation command, the number of prizes to the general prize opening displayed in the first area α (“Today's general prize number”) is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the error message is being displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered in visibility. Will be updated. That is, the display of the error message does not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the general winning opening has been won and that the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

In the example of FIGS. 88 (f) and 88 (g), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, but the winning in the first starting winning opening is shown. When it occurs, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. Further, even when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening, the visibility of the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is hindered regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. Updated without.

Further, in the example of FIG. 88 (f), the characters "An error has occurred" are displayed, which simply notifies that an error has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality specified by the abnormality detection specification command. For example, when an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a magnetic anomaly has occurred is received, the characters "A magnetic error has occurred." Is displayed, and an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred has been received. Occasionally, the text "A vibration error has occurred." May be displayed, and when an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a radio error has occurred is received, the text "A radio error has occurred." May be displayed. ..

In this example, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as the vertices is defined as the first area α, and the coordinates (a + 1). , 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) are defined as the vertices of the rectangular area β, but the first area where the winning number information can be displayed, the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the hold The second area on which the information and the error message can be displayed is not limited to the rectangular area, and may be any area on the screen that does not overlap with each other.

(Display / non-display setting of winning number information)
As described with reference to FIG. 49, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 for operating the glass door frame 903a by opening it forward (the clerk at the game hall can operate it but the player cannot operate it) is in the display position (second). Position) is set, and when the player's setting screen (see FIG. 50) is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by the player's operation, the general winning opening is set. Information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings in the door is to be displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 are display modes of the screen in a state where the setting to display the winning number information is made in this way, and when the setting to display the winning number information is made. In the 1st area α, not only the number of prizes in the general winning opening, but also the number of winnings in the 1st starting winning opening (so-called “navel”) and the winning in the 2nd starting winning opening (so-called “electric chew”). The number shall also be displayed. That is, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening according to the operation of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 49, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to be hidden (first position), the winning number information (the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is displayed by the operation button 9030. , And, regardless of whether or not the setting for displaying the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is set, the winning number information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Do not show. Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), when the operation button 9030 is not set to display the winning number information (in the case of the non-display setting). ), The winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 905.

The example shown in FIGS. 89B and 89C is a screen display mode in a state in which the winning number information is not displayed in this way, and the winning number information is not displayed. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed in the first area α, and the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening (so-called "navel") and the second starting winning opening (so-called "electric chew") The number of prizes won is also not displayed.

In this way, by making it possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information according to the setting operation on the amusement park side and according to the setting operation on the player side, it is possible to set according to the convenience of the amusement park side. In addition, the winning number information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 89 (a), (b), and (c), when the winning number information is not displayed, the error message display area 5E is compared with the case where the winning number information is displayed. Each area of the fourth symbol display area 905A, 905B, the decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, and the start winning prize memory display area 905H is common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number. It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change that sets whether or not to display the winning number information.

On the other hand, when the winning number information is not displayed, as shown in FIGS. 89 (a), (b), and (c), the winning number information is displayed (display examples of FIGS. 87 and 88). Unlike, the background image can be visually recognized in the first area α and the second area β. In the example of FIGS. 89 (a), (b), and (c), the first area of the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]. Area corresponding to α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0,0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] and area corresponding to second area β [coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates ( Both of the rectangular areas defined with X and Y) as the vertices], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

Therefore, in the example of FIGS. 89 (a), (b), and (c), the player is a character included in the rectangular region defined by the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. D is visible, and character E included in a rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is also visible.

In this way, with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. While reducing the control burden by not changing (commonizing) with the setting that does not, other images (background images) can be visually recognized by the setting that displays the winning number information and the setting that does not display the winning number information. By making the range different, we are trying to improve the interest when the winning number information is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89B, when the image display device 905 is performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information, the general winning opening is won. Even when the above occurs, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed because the information on the number of winnings is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), when the image display device 905 is performing the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol, a prize may be generated in the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 89 (d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed because the information on the number of winnings is not displayed.

In addition, in the example of FIGS. 89 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed even when the winning to the general winning opening occurs. If it is set not to be displayed, the number of prizes in the 1st start winning opening will not be displayed even if the winning in the 1st starting winning opening occurs, and if the winning in the 2nd starting winning opening occurs. However, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in each winning opening according to the operation of the player.

(Each item of prize number information)
FIG. 90 shows an example of items of the winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. Note that FIG. 90 shows items related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening, but similarly to the items related to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Items related to the number of winnings can be displayed in the first area α.

It is possible to display "Today's general winning number (referred to as A1)" which is the total value of the winning numbers to each general winning opening from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and adds the value of the general winning number counter by 1 each time the general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be totaled.

In addition, it is possible to display the "today's general winning ratio (referred to as A2)", which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. The total number of outs can be totaled by adding one by one, and A2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "Today's number of general prize balls (referred to as A3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In addition, it is possible to display "Today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)", which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

The ROM 90121 stores the number of prize balls defined for each of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, and each winning opening of the large winning opening. .. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the general prize opening designation command is designated each time the general prize opening designation command is received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize balls to the value of the general prize ball counter, A3 can be totaled. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening. The total number of prize balls can be totaled by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize holes specified by each command to the value of the prize ball counter every time a large prize opening winning command is received. By calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls, A4 can be totaled.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current game state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the game state by the game state designation command, and wins a prize in the low base state. The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be separately aggregated.

Specifically, it is possible to display the "general winning numbers in the low base state (referred to as B1)", which is the total number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state. It is possible to display "the number of general prizes in a high base state (referred to as C1)" which is the total value of the number of prizes in.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 shall set the value of the low-base medium general winning number counter and the value of the high-base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. .. Then, during the period in which the game state specified by the received game state designation command is in the normal state, B1 is added by adding the value of the low-base medium general prize number counter by 1 each time the general prize opening designation command is received. During the period when the game status specified by the received game status specification command is either the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the value of the high-base medium general prize counter is set for each reception of the general prize opening designation command. By adding one by one, C1 can be totaled.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio in the low base state (referred to as B2)", which is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general winning ratio in a high base state (referred to as C2)".

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low-base medium-out number counter and the value of the high-base medium-out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. Then, in the normal state, the number of low-base medium-outs can be totaled by adding the value of the low-base medium-outs counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out-ball detector is received. B2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of low-base medium outs. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the number of high-base medium-outs can be totaled by adding the value of the high-base medium-outs counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out-ball detector is received. Therefore, C2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high-base medium outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)", which is the total number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the low base state, and the high base state. It is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the state.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low-base medium general prize ball counter and the value of the high-base medium general prize ball counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. And. Then, during the period when the game state specified by the received game state designation command is in the normal state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening designated by the received general prize opening designation command is set to the low base medium general prize ball number counter. B3 (“general prize ball number in low base state”) can be totaled by adding to the value of, and the game state specified by the received game state specification command is either the probability change state or the time saving state. During the period, C3 (“General prize balls in the high base state” is obtained by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize openings specified by the received general prize opening designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter. ") Can be aggregated.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in the low base state (referred to as B4)", which is the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, with respect to the number of prize balls in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in a high base state (referred to as C4)" which is the ratio of C3.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 shall set the value of the low-base medium prize ball counter and the value of the high-base medium prize ball counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. .. Then, in the normal state, each time the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening designated by each command is given to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the number of balls counter, it is possible to total the number of low-base middle prize balls, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low-base middle prize balls, B4 ("low base state" General prize ball ratio ") can be aggregated. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings specified by each command is increased each time the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be totaled, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 ("high") "General prize ball ratio in the base state") can be aggregated.

In this way, since the information related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be aggregated for each gaming state, the player can grasp the information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), attention is paid to items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is a high base state (probability change state or time saving state), attention is paid to items C1 to C4. Become.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the gaming state is in the low base state, while does not display the items C1 to C4 when the gaming state is in the high base state. , C1 to C4 items may be displayed in the first area α, while items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Further, although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the game state, in the low base state, the items B1 to B4 are more visible than the items C1 to C4. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner that is easier to see (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4 in a high base state.

(Aggregation of prize number information during the set period)
In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 can aggregate information on the number of prizes in the period set by the player, and is the total value of the number of prizes in each general prize opening in the set period. D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

When the totaling period according to the operation of the player shown in FIG. 91, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 and totals. The value of the timer is set in the set period (aggregation period according to the operation of the player), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time the general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is added by 1 during the setting period, and when the counting timer times out (when the set counting period has elapsed), the general winning during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

While the aggregation timer is updated during the period when the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period after the last reception of the detection signal from the out ball detector), the period during which the number of outs is not increasing (for example, for example). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last detection signal was received from the out-ball detector), the aggregation timer may be stopped without being updated. In this way, the period during which the game ball is not fired in the game area 9010 may be excluded from the aggregation period.

When the aggregation timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the aggregation timer is set again during the set period (player's). It is set to the aggregation period according to the operation), and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, the value of the general winning number counter is added every time the general winning opening designation command is received, and when the totaling timer times out again (when the set totaling period has elapsed again), the general winning number counter during the set period The value of is displayed as D1 in the first area α. In this way, for each aggregation period set by the player, D1 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed.

Further, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio (referred to as D2)", which is the ratio of D1 to the number of outs of the gaming machine in the set period. When the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 during the set period, the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 during the set period is set to 0. By adding the value of the out number counter during the set period by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, the number of outs in the set period can be totaled. D2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls (referred to as D3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio (referred to as D4)", which is the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

When the aggregation period according to the operation of the player shown in FIG. 91, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and at the same time, sets it to 0. The value of the aggregation timer is set in the set period (aggregation period according to the operation of the player), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time a general winning slot designation command is received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning slot designated by the general winning slot designation command is added to the value of the general winning slot counter during the set period, and the totaling timer is set. The value of the general prize ball counter during the set period when the time-out occurs (when the set aggregation period has elapsed) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

When the aggregation timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the aggregation timer is set again during the set period (player). The aggregation timer is set to the aggregation period according to the operation of), and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, the value of the general prize ball counter is added every time the general winning opening designation command is received, and when the totaling timer times out again (when the set totaling period has elapsed again), the general prize ball during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed as D3 in the first area α. In this way, for each aggregation period set by the player, D3 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 during the set period, the effect control CPU 90120 also sets the value of the prize ball counter stored in the RAM 90122 during the set period to 0. The value of is set to 0, and each time the start winning slot designation command, the general winning slot designation command, and the large winning slot winning command that specifies the winning to the grand winning slot are received, the winning slot specified by each command is received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to to the value of the prize ball counter during the set period, the number of prize balls in the set period can be totaled, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period. It is possible to total D4 by calculating.

Since the general winning opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120 specifies which general winning opening the game ball has won, the effect control CPU 90120 has the first general winning opening 9050A to the first. 4 The number of winnings to the general winning opening 9050D is totaled individually, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4 and D1 to D4 are totaled for each general winning opening, and the total value is calculated. It is possible to display in the first area α.

Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and related to the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the items is to be displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the game state and the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening It may be possible to select which of the related items to be displayed in the first area α by an operation on the playground side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and the player side. (For example, an operation using the operation button 9030) may be selected.

In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 90121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the aggregated value does not reach the reference value. As shown in FIG. 91 (4) described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α does not reach the reference value of the item. .. As a result, the player selects the gaming machine by grasping whether or not the aggregated value of the items displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not the game on the gaming machine should be continued).

Next, a method of setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. 91. For example, the aggregation period setting screen of FIG. 91 further sets the aggregation period when the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2) described above is selected to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. A screen that is displayed when a selection screen for selecting whether or not to select is displayed, and when a selection is made to set the aggregation period on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed). And.

On the setting screen of FIG. 91 (1), the message "Please set the aggregation period" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed below it. On the setting screen, an icon containing the characters "10 minutes", an icon containing the characters "30 minutes", and an icon containing the characters "60 minutes" are displayed, and it is called "Enter button after selecting with the jog dial". A message is displayed, and an arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 9030 (jog dial) after rotating the operation button 9030 is displayed.

To set the aggregation period to 10 minutes, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left to select the icon containing the characters "10 minutes", and then press the operation button 9030 to "set". The message "The period is 10 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Further, when the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 91 (1), when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "30 minutes" selected, FIG. 91 (2) As shown in, the message "The setting period is 30 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. When setting the aggregation period to 60 minutes, by rotating the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right and pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon including the character "60 minutes" selected, the operation button 9030 is pressed. The message "The setting period is 60 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes.
That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

In this way, it is possible to set a desired aggregation period according to the operation of the player. In the example of FIG. 91, 30 minutes is set as the aggregation period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91 (3), the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as the "general winning number (D1) in the set period" in the first area α. In the example of FIG. 91 (3), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is stored. Since it is 37, the aggregated value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, there is no notification that the aggregated value has not reached the reference value.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 91 (4), 30 is stored as a reference value for the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is totaled. Since the value is 29, the aggregated value has not reached the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the aggregated value has not reached the reference value (display of a message "below the reference value (30 times / 30 minutes)") is given.

(Items related to the number of prizes in the starting prize opening)
It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command for designating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won when a winning is generated in the starting winning opening. By the same method as the aggregation process when the general winning opening designation command that specifies which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings has been won is received, "Today's number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening (A1) "Equivalent)", "Today's winning ratio to the 1st starting winning slot (equivalent to A2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on today's winning to the 1st starting winning slot (equivalent to A3)", And "The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of today's first start winning opening to today's total number of winning balls (equivalent to A4)", and "Today's second starting winning opening" Number of winnings (equivalent to A1) ”,“ Today's winning ratio to the 2nd starting winning opening (equivalent to A2) ”,“ Number of prize balls awarded based on today's winning to the 2nd starting winning opening (Equivalent to A3) ”and“ The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's winning to the second starting prize opening to today's total number of prize balls (corresponding to A4) ”. Therefore, it can be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)", "the first in the low base state". The number of prize balls given based on the winning of 1 start winning opening (corresponding to B3), and the first starting winning opening in the low base state with respect to the number of prize balls given in the low base state. The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (corresponding to B4), "the number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", and "the second start in the low base state". Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of prize balls awarded based on winning to the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" Granted in the low base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting prize opening in the low base state to the number of prize balls (corresponding to B4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. Is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)", and "the first in the high base state". The number of prize balls given based on the winning of 1 start winning opening (corresponding to C3), and the first starting winning opening in the high base state with respect to the number of prize balls given in the high base state. The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (corresponding to C4), "the number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", and "the second start in the high base state". Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to C2) "," Number of prize balls awarded based on winning to the second starting winning opening in high base state (corresponding to C3) ", and" Granted in high base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting prize opening in the high base state to the number of prize balls (corresponding to C4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. Is.

In addition, "the number of prizes to the first start winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D2)", "the first starting prize in the set period". The number of prize balls given based on the winning of the mouth (corresponding to D3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the set period is given based on the winning of the first starting winning mouth in the set period. "Ratio of the number of winning balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of winnings to the second starting winning slot in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "Ratio to winning the second starting winning slot in the set period (equivalent to D1)" "Equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on winning the second starting prize opening during the set period (corresponding to D3)", and "Setting for the number of prize balls awarded during the set period" The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting winning opening in the period (corresponding to D4) ”can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α.

(Display of roles and ratios)
Further, in the game machine 901, also in the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011, each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, the following , Also called "entry area"), the number of game balls entering the area is totaled. Further, in the gaming machine 901, information such as the winning combination and the winning combination can be displayed on the display monitors 9029 shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 provided on the main board 9011.

As described above, the gaming machine manufacturer usually designs the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency.
In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming medium has entered the general winning area at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the gaming machine having the general winning area. Hereinafter, the display of the accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 9011 will be described.

The main board 9011 shown in FIG. 94 is a board that controls games. The main board 9011 is enclosed in a board case 90201 as shown in FIG. 96, and a display monitor 9029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main board 9011 as shown in FIG. 96 (A). There is. The display monitor 9029 is arranged in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 9011 cannot be visually recognized when the glass door frame 903a is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 9011 is the back side of the game board 902 when the glass door frame 903a is opened. This is the front of the door, which is different from the front of the gaming machine 901. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 9011 and the front surface of the gaming machine 901 may be common.

On the main board 9011, information on winning a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening ( The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls by winning the prize to the attacker) are input and totaled, and the display monitor 9029 is the ratio of the number of prize balls by the prize to the large winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Ren (%), the role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) to the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. ) Is displayed. The role-ren is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning a prize to the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the total number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball fluctuates as the passable width of the game ball fluctuates. be. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning rate of the game ball is a certain amount.

As a method of aggregating and calculating information on winning a game, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) by winning the first starting port (heso) and the general prize opening (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls, the first 2 The number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the starting prize opening (Denchu), and the special electric role prize, which is the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening (attacker). The number of balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and 10 sets, that is, 60,000 winning combinations (%) and winning ratios (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric role The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Further, 60,000 pieces of 11 sets are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative winning combination (%) and winning combination (%) can be calculated.

The display monitor 9029 switches and displays 60,000 winning combinations (%), winning ratios (%), and cumulative winning combinations (%) and winning ratios (%) at predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). be able to.
That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (navel) and the winning to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning a prize and the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying 60,000 invasions of Korea (%) is reflected in the 60000 invasions of Korea (%) displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 60,000 invasions of Korea. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the role ream (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the total prize balls Such discrepancies can be prevented by performing input and aggregation of numbers at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 60,000 winning combinations (%)).

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the large winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the prize ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of gaming media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the number of balls acquired as a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. Therefore, the role association can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Role Ren = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)
Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 decimal point rounded down by dividing 42000 by 60,000).
However, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60,000.
As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%.
That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the gaming machine is easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, a decimal number. Calculate 234 in the notation. Similarly, the lower 1-byte 10h is rounded down to the number of winning balls of 00A410h, and the number of winning balls of bonus is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the gaming machine becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 90201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized. The board case 90201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 9011 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 9011. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 9029. The "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 9011 and the main board 9011.

Further, the board case 90201 is provided with a sticker for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 9011. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 9029. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, when the display monitor 9029 is arranged in the first part of the main board 9011 (for example, the central part of the main board 9011), the second part is different from the first part in the main board 9011. Even if other electrical components or the like are arranged in a portion (for example, a peripheral portion of the main board 9011), a hole portion, a heat radiation hole, and a seal are arranged in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main board 9011. good. In particular, the heat dissipation hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 9029 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 9029. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiating hole is arranged at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 9029. According to this, since the display monitor 9029 does not interfere with the visibility, it is easy to confirm the information regarding the winning.

Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap the portion of the substrate case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 9011. Specifically, the portion of the board case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main board 9011 does not overlap with the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered by the wiring.

Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine, but in order to avoid misidentification as the 7-segment display monitor 9029, the main board 9011 should be separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them so as to sandwich the. The other electronic components referred to here are preferably large-scale control components such as a CPU.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball. The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, it is initialized, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur in a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed. The error display and warning display will be described further later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio.
1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 90100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 9029. Will be missing.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 90100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or combination (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the winning ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 9029 displays the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%) on 7 segments, and displays each value by switching it every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is calculated after 30 seconds. If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 95 can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

Further, in the above calculation method, an example of totaling the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired balls for the accessory, and the number of acquired balls for the continuous accessory on the counter is shown. A sensor provided detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, each prize ball number is individually totaled, and then a counter for the number of winning balls and a counter for the number of consecutive winning balls. You may calculate the value to be aggregated in. In addition, a sensor individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge, are used, and based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated in the counter of the number of balls acquired as a bonus and the counter of the number of balls acquired as a continuous bonus may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the winning combination ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which sensors provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result.

As shown in FIG. 94, a display monitor 9029 is connected to the main board 9011 in the gaming machine 901. As shown in FIG. 95, the main board 9011 is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board 902 (see FIG. 46) provided in the gaming machine frame 903 in the gaming machine 901. On the back side of the game board 902, in addition to the main board 9011, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, a voice lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. ing. The main board 9011 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 9011. The main board 9011 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main substrate 9011 may be overlapped so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral substrate.

The RAM 90102 in the main board 9011 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, and a second general winning number counter. A third general prize number counter, a fourth general prize number counter, and a large prize number counter are provided.

The first gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 9021A. The second gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 9021B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 9022A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 9022B.

The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

A clear switch is connected to the main board 9011. The clear switch is arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the winning combination and the winning combination stored in the RAM 90102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when a situation occurs in which the calculation of the winning combination or the winning combination has to be redone, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the winning combination or the winning combination. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination or combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data.

Further, RTC90106 is provided on the main board 9011. The main board 9011 can detect the current time by RTC90106. The RTC90106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in this embodiment, the RTC90106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 96A, the main board 9011 is housed in the board case 90201. A caulking pin 9011B is attached to the board case 90201. By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011 is completely enclosed in the board case 90201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 9011 are prevented. The substrate case 90201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011. Further, a sealing sticker 9011S is attached to the substrate case 90201 to prove that the main substrate 9011 is sealed. The sealing seal 9011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 90201. The sealing sticker 9011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 9011, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 9029. As described above, the display monitor 9029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing seal 9011S.

The display monitor 9029 includes a first display unit 9029A, a second display unit 9029B, a third display unit 9029C, and a fourth display unit 9029D. The first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 9029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 96 (B) is displayed.
The aggregation period is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D of the lower two digits. In the display No. 1, the short-term winning combination is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term winning combination is displayed. In display No. 3, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed, and in display No. 2, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 60,000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the combination and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the combination and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the winning combination and the winning ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the role-ren may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls, and the role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the big winning opening in the big hit game state. It may be the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the winning of.

When the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the first display unit is displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. When the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B.

When the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. When the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D.

The main board 9011 determines the number of game balls that have entered the attacker, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening in calculating the winning combination and the winning ratio. Aggregating. In the main processing, the CPU 90103 includes the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general. A state confirmation process for confirming the state (presence / absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 9024D is performed.

In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signals are output from the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the values of the first gate pass count counter and the second gate pass count counter are added, and the first start port switch 9022A, When the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 9022B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 9023, the detection signals are added. When the value of the large winning number counter is added and the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Is the number of game balls entering each entry area (each prize) by adding the values of the first general prize counter, the second general prize counter, the third general prize counter, and the fourth general prize counter. The number of winning game balls in the mouth) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 90102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (included in the switch state confirmation process). ) Therefore, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each approach area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to an increase in the number of execution programs. ..

The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 97, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is the general winning opening winning ball (the winning ball from the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode)). 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting prize opening (heso)), ordinary electric role prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric role prize ball (winning to the attacker) The number of prize balls. The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of prize balls. In the CPU 90103, the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls to the general winning opening and the first starting opening The number of winning game balls may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting opening prize ball The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 90102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of these prize balls. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area.
The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of a counter of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a combination combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination of the totals for 10 sets. In the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011, the winning ratio and the winning combination of 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of winning balls based on the number of winning balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And the total cumulative role ratio and the role combination are stored in the combination role ratio storage area. The winning combination ratio storage area for storing the winning combination ratio and the winning combination for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and winning combinations for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 90101, RAM 90102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 98, the address / data signal line of the ROM 90101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter)). Of these, 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 90103 specifies this ROM area to read data from the ROM 90101. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 90103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 90102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 90103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 90102 or to the RAM 90102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Further, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 90102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) is composed of a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas, as shown in FIG. Has been done. In the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to this RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction are used. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the above control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

Further, data used for displaying the winning combination and the winning combination is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other area.
For example, the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a combination / combination ratio storage area for the total total. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a storage area for 10 sets of combination roles are provided. The storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other area store data having different start addresses of the subroutines.

In this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

Further, the main board 9011 controls the display monitor 9029 to display the winning combination and the winning combination. Here, the main board 9011 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 100A is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 100A, when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, the short-term combination of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term role series of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term combination of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed. Further, a short-term combination is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the short-term combination is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term role series of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-2), the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-3), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative total combination is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative total is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-4), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (B-5). After that, the display of the short-term combination of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term winning combination of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term winning combination ratio of display No. 2 to the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 9029 switches between the short-term winning combination, the short-term winning combination, the total cumulative winning combination, and the total cumulative winning combination every 30 seconds for display.

Further, in the main board 9011, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total cumulative total for 10 sets and the combination combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 101, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", and "66", respectively. "117""45""21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 million area to the 10th storage area is changed to "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21".
Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 shown in FIG. 94 includes a door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a. The opening of the glass door frame 903a does not correspond to an abnormality when it is performed by an employee, but it often corresponds to an abnormality when it is performed by a person other than the employee.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. When the door opening sensor detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a, the door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 9011.

Door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 903a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 903a by a person other than the employee. Here, the door opening is detected on the assumption that the glass door frame 903a is abnormally opened. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 903a normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes that the glass door frame 903a is opened. Since there are many, it is possible to prevent a particular problem from occurring.

Subsequently, the control regarding the display of the winning combination ratio executed on the main board 9011 will be described.
When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 9011, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 90102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the winning combination and the winning combination stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is maintained without being cleared. The data used for displaying the winning combination and the winning combination stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. After performing the initial settings, the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. The combination / combination-related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination / combination-related processing. On the main board 9011, as shown in FIG. 102, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation is detected in the combination / combination-related processing (step S90101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; YES), the warning display preparation is performed (step S90102), and the process proceeds to step S90103. Further, when the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and the abnormal operation is not detected (step S90101; NO), the winning information is acquired (step S90103). As for the winning information, the game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Obtained by.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the business hours (step S90104).
Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured and determined by RTC90106. As a result, when the current time is within the business hours (step S90104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105).
Whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105; YES), the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. It is determined whether or not the signal is present (step S90106). The unit time and the predetermined number of balls here are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a prize cannot be won in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls to be fired is 100 per minute, for example, 100 balls per minute can be appropriately determined. More specifically, when the unit time is 1 second, the predetermined number of balls is 5, or when the unit time is 10 seconds, the predetermined number is 30 or the like.
The unit time is measured by RTC90106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

As a result, when the attacker does not win more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time (step S90106; NO), the number of prize balls is added according to the prize information acquired in step S90103. The process is performed (step S90107). The prize ball number addition process is performed when the warning display is not prepared. Here, if the warning display is being prepared, the combination / role ratio related processing is terminated as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric role prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add the number of prize balls.

Further, in the prize ball number addition process, the general prize opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric role prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. Calculate the total number of prize balls for each prize ball. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed up (calculation timer = 0) (step S90108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed up (step S90108; NO), the combination / combination-related processing is terminated as it is. When the calculation timer is timed up (step S90108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S90109).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by adding in step S90107 is the calculated execution number (step S90110). The number of calculation executions can be an appropriate number, and is, for example, a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number can be slightly less than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the number of calculation executions is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payout balls from 6000.

As a result, if the number of prize balls (total prize balls) is not the calculated execution number (step S90110; NO), the combination / combination-related processing is terminated as it is. Further, when the number of prize balls is the calculated execution number (step S90110; YES), the winning combination and the winning combination ratio are calculated (step S90111). Here, the short-term combination, short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (total cumulative combination), and cumulative combination ratio (total cumulative combination ratio) are calculated respectively. Therefore, the short-term combination, short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination, and cumulative combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, the combination / combination display processing is performed (step S90112), and the combination / combination-related processing is completed.

If it is determined in step S90104 that it is not within business hours (step S90104; NO), or if it is determined in step S90105 that the door frame is not closed (step S90105; NO), the attacker is made per unit time in step S90106. When it is determined that the game balls have won more than a predetermined number of balls (step S90106; YES), preparation for error display is performed (step S90113). After that, the role-relation / role-ratio-related processing is completed.

Next, the combination / combination display control process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination / combination display control process. As shown in FIG. 103, in the combination / combination display control process, it is determined whether or not the combination / combination display is ready (step S90201). When it is determined that the combination / combination display preparation process has not been completed (step S90201; NO), it is determined whether or not the error display preparation has been completed (step S90202).

As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (step S90202; YES), an error display is performed (step S90203). The error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and "0" and "1" can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when displaying an error, a predetermined error may be displayed on another display device, for example, an image display device 905, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, or the like, or a game. The effect lamp 909 may be turned on, blinked, or the like in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Further, these may be combined.

After displaying the error, it is determined whether or not the warning display is ready (step S90204). Further, even when it is determined in step S90202 that it is not determined whether or not the error display preparation is completed (step S90202; NO), it is also determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204).

As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204; YES), the warning display is performed (step S90205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and "0" and "6" can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 9029 may be blinked or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 9029 in order to indicate that the warning is given. Alternatively, the display may be displayed by increasing the brightness of the display on the display monitor 9029. As described above, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays.

Further, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device, for example, an image display device 905, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, or the like, or a game. The effect lamp 909 may be turned on, blinked, or the like in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Further, these may be combined.

When the warning is displayed, the combination / combination control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in step S90204 that the warning display preparation is not completed (step S90204; NO), the combination / combination control process is also terminated.

Further, when it is determined that the combination / combination display is ready (step S90201; YES), the short-term combination display is performed (step S90206). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed by starting the short-term combination display (step S90207). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90207; NO), the process returns to step S90206 and the short-term combination display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90207; YES), the process proceeds to step S90208. In this way, the short-term combination display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms).

Subsequently, the short-term role ratio display is performed (step S90208), and it is determined whether or not the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after starting the short-term role ratio display (step S90209). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90209; NO), the process returns to step S90208 and the short-term combination display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90209; YES), the process proceeds to step S90210. In this way, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

Subsequently, the cumulative winning combination display is performed (step S90210), and it is determined whether or not the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after starting the cumulative winning combination display (step S90211). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90211; NO), the process returns to step S90210 and the cumulative combination display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90211; YES), the process proceeds to step S90212. In this way, the cumulative combination display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

Subsequently, the cumulative combination ratio display is performed (step S90212), and it is determined whether or not the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after the cumulative combination display is started (step S90213). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90213; NO), the process returns to step S90212 and the cumulative combination ratio display is continued. In this way, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90213; YES), the combination / combination control process is terminated.

As described above, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the short-term combination, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination, and the cumulative combination ratio are displayed by the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 that controls the game so as not to interfere with the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and the windmills provided on the game board.

Further, the display monitor 9029 is arranged in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered. Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating holes provided in the board case 90201 are not directly in front of the board case 90201. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being obscured by the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 9011. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being obscured by peripheral boards such as the effect control board 9012. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 can display the winning combination and the winning ratio regarding the relationship between the prize balls paid out by the passage of the electric chew or the attacker and the prize balls paid out by the passage of the general winning opening. .. Further, the display monitor 9029 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term combination and a cumulative combination at predetermined periods. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

Further, since the display monitor 9029 displays the winning combination (short-term winning combination) and the winning combination (short-term winning combination) for each 6000 prize balls, the total number of prize balls becomes 6000, and so on. The numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10000. Alternatively, the unit may be time instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

Further, the display monitor 9029 displays the cumulative combination and the cumulative combination ratio in addition to the combination (short-term combination) and the combination ratio (short-term combination ratio) for each 6000 prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term combination or short-term combination ratio for each predetermined unit with the cumulative combination or cumulative combination ratio. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 housed in the crimped board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of fraud such as falsifying the display on the display monitor 9029.

Further, the gaming machine 901 is provided with a detection means for detecting and detecting fraud that makes it impossible to display appropriate predetermined information. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside business hours for games, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The game machine 901 operates during the business hours of the game hall, and the counting of prize balls during the hours other than the business hours is highly probable to be a fraudulent act. Further, the gaming machine 901 plays a game with the door frame closed, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is a fraudulent act.

Further, during the game of the game machine 901, the game ball cannot be launched beyond a certain speed. For example, the maximum number of launches of a game ball is 100 per minute. Therefore, the upper limit of winning a game ball in one minute is almost 100. Therefore, for example, when 100 or more game balls are won in 12 seconds, the probability of cheating is extremely high.

In the game machine 901, in order to detect fraud, a prize ball is obtained when the game ball is not closed during business hours, the glass door frame 903a is not closed, or the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. The addition of numbers is excluded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress falsification of information such as role associations and role ratios due to these frauds. In addition, instead of the number of prize balls when the attacker has won more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time, fraud may be detected based on the number of balls paid out per unit time.

Further, in the game machine 901, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 90102 reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

Further, the ring buffer is provided with the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and when the data in the zeroth storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the tenth storage area is stored. It will be erased. Therefore, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity. In addition, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased.

When moving the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased in the ring buffer. Therefore, since the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity, and it is possible to calculate the winning combination and the winning combination with a large amount of data.

When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area may be erased, but also all the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be erased. .. In this case, it is possible to more preferably prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. Further, a part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased, and then a part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

Further, in the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer is described, but the data other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total cumulative total is also erased in part or all of the data. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, each data of the short-term combination, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination, and the cumulative combination ratio is displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The cycle for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate cycle. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be performed every hour. Further, the displayed data may be data other than the data of the short-term winning combination, the short-term winning combination, the cumulative winning combination, and the cumulative winning combination ratio, or may be only a part of these data.

In addition, when displaying each data of the short-term combination, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination, and the cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term combination is displayed differently from the other data. Specifically, short-term roles are displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that new data will be displayed from the short-term role association.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation.
The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the winning combination or the winning combination. When this switch is operated, the data of the winning combination and the winning combination can be falsified, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the gaming machine 901, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, fraud such as falsification of data can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, and the third general winning opening switch 9024C , The winning combination and the winning combination ratio are calculated based on the number of winning balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. For example, using a sensor individually provided for the attacker (count switch 9023) and a sensor provided after the discharge passages for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge. Based on the detection result, when the counter of the number of winning balls and the counter of the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled to calculate the winning combination and the winning ratio, it is difficult to identify from which winning opening the winning combination is made. There is a risk that the calculation of the ratio and the role will be complicated.
In this regard, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening. By detecting that the game medium has won a prize with the switch 9024D and calculating the winning combination and the winning ratio based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, the number of winning balls is determined based on the winning of each winning opening. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the winning combination and the winning combination, and it is possible to calculate with high accuracy.

(Modification example of display control and display items of prize number information)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α has been described. For example, items related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B, a pass gate designation command for specifying which gate the game ball has passed through is issued from the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) to the effect control board 9012 (effect). By transmitting to the control CPU 90120), the effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B and display it in the first area α.

For example, today's number of gate passes (corresponding to A1), today's gate passage count (corresponding to A1), today's gate passage count (corresponding to A1) by the same method as the aggregation process when receiving the general prize opening designation command that specifies which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings Gate pass ratio (equivalent to A2), low base state gate pass count (equivalent to B1), low base state gate pass ratio (equivalent to B2), high base state gate pass count (equivalent to C1), high base The gate passage ratio of the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages during the set period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio during the set period (corresponding to D2) can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. .. Further, these items can be aggregated for each gate (for each of the gates 9041A and 9041B) and displayed in the first area α.

(2) Further, since the effect control CPU 90120 receives the big prize opening winning command from the game control microcomputer 90100, the number of winnings to the big winning opening can be totaled and the winning to the big winning opening can be counted. The number of prize balls given based on the total can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the aggregation process when a general prize opening designation command for specifying which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings has been won is received, "Today's large winning openings (A1) "Equivalent)", "Today's big prize opening ratio (equivalent to A2)", "Number of prize balls given based on today's big winning opening (equivalent to A3)", "Today's total The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on today's prizes to the prizeballs to the number of prizeballs (equivalent to A4) "," The number of prizes to the prizeballs in the set period (equivalent to D1) " , "Ratio of prizes to the big prize opening in the set period (equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls given based on winning the prize to the big prize opening in the set period (equivalent to D3)", and "In the set period The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the big prize opening in the set period to the number of prize balls given (corresponding to D4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. be.

Here, "the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on today's prize-winning opening to today's total number of prize balls (equivalent to A4)" and "the prize balls given during the set period" When the "ratio of the number of prize balls (corresponding to D4) given based on the winning of the big prize opening in the set period to the number" is higher than the predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), a notification to that effect is given. You may try to do it. For example, the message "The ratio of prize balls for the big prize opening exceeds the reference value (60%)" may be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, which is controlled to open and close by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, and the opening and closing control by the special variable winning ball device 907 with respect to the total number of winning balls. When the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the large winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), a notification to that effect may be given. For example, a message such as "The prize ball ratio of the prize balls exceeds the reference value (70%)" may be displayed in the first area α.

(3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, the effect control CPU 90120 sends each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each approach area. An example of totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area has been described based on the above, but in the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side of the game control microcomputer 9011 on the main board 9011 side, each approach area is entered. The number of entry of the game ball is totaled, or the effect control CPU 90120 enters each approach area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each approach area. It is also possible to aggregate the numbers.

The number of game balls entering each approach area (counter value corresponding to each switch) totaled by the game control microcomputer 90100 or the effect control CPU 90120 on the main board 9011 side is transmitted to the effect control CPU 90120. Then, it can be displayed on the image display device 905. For example, by outputting a command for designating the total number of approaches to each approach area from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 enters each approach area based on the command. It is possible to specify the number of intrusions and display them in the first area α.

It should be noted that the number of entries into each approach area counted on the game control microcomputer 90100 side is displayed on the main board 9011 such as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. It may be displayed in. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B is used. It is also possible to notify the fact by performing a specific display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The display device provided on the main board 9011 for displaying the aggregated results is not limited to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the like, in order to display the aggregated results. It may be a display device provided exclusively for the device. Further, the display device may have any form such as a lamp, an LED, a 7-segment display, a liquid crystal display device, an EL panel, and a light guide plate.

The value of each counter (the number of entries into each approach area) stored in the RAM 90102 can be specified by, for example, the game state flag (probability change state, time saving state, etc.) stored in the RAM 90102 by the game control microcomputer 90100. When the reset operation for resetting the game state (flag according to the game state) is performed by the game hall side (for example, a clerk), it is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 and displayed on the image display device 905 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 9011. The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 902, and the game board 902 is rotated forward with respect to the game machine frame 903 by using the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 903. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back surface side of the game board 902 can be operated.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the aggregation period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described, but the example is described in advance regardless of the operation of the player. The totaling period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by the operation of the game hall side), and the number of winnings in the set totaling period. Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, it may be notified to that effect.

(5) Further, when the winning of a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the first area α may be notified to that effect. For example, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening has not been generated for 10 minutes, the message "No general winning for 10 minutes" may be displayed in the first area α. This predetermined period may be set by an operation on the playground side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030). It may be possible to set by.

(6) The above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine provided with a distribution device such that the winning ratios to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening are a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). , The winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which the gaming balls accepted by the sorting device are alternately distributed to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. By providing the distribution device, it is also possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening. The above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine in which the distribution device alternately distributes the game balls to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening, and the winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening is first. It can be displayed in the area α. However, since the number of winnings to the general winning opening is naturally determined according to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let it.

(7) In FIG. 91, the totaling period can be set according to the operation of the player, but the winning number information is reset according to the operation of the player, and the totaling of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do so. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and then the effect control CPU 90120 issues a general winning opening designation command. Each time a command is received, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed according to the operation of the player before the elapse of the set period. For example, although the totaling period is initially set to 30 minutes, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the totaling period to 10 minutes in order to know the totaling result quickly. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation result for a longer period, the player resets the aggregation period before the set period elapses and extends the aggregation period to 30 minutes. May be good. Further, the aggregation period once set may be extended according to the operation of the player after the set period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set aggregation period, has passed and the aggregation result for that 10 minutes is displayed once, the player performs an extension operation in order to grasp the aggregation result for a longer aggregation period. The aggregation period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both a 10-minute aggregation result and a 60-minute aggregation result including the 10-minute aggregation result can be obtained).

(8) In the demo screen displayed on the image display device 905, or in the first area α in the state where the game is being performed (the state in which the game end determination is not made and the demo screen is not displayed). , An image explaining which of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening is the winning opening provided on the game board surface may be displayed. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in each winning opening may be notified.

(9) In the above embodiment, the game field setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the game field setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are displayed. When the operation button 9030 is pressed while the icon including the characters "display" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2) so that the image can be displayed on the image display device 905, the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 905. (Display control of FIGS. 87 and 88 is executed), and when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "not displayed" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2), the winning number information is displayed as an image. It may not be displayed on the device 905 (the display control of FIG. 89 is executed).

Further, the playground setting and the player setting may be given the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information according to the order of the received setting operations. That is, it may be decided whether or not to display the winning number information with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) thereafter. When set, the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIGS. 87 and 88 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are set so that the winning number information is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the second position (display position). In the case of, the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIGS. 87 and 88 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the setting for not displaying the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) thereafter. If is, the winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 89 is executed). Further, even when the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are set to display the winning number information, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the first position (non-display position). ), The winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 89 is executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the clerk of the amusement park can operate the display changeover switch 9032 to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, and the player can set the operation button 9030. It is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by operating the above. While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, the player cannot set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (1) to FIG. The setting screen on the player side as shown in (3) may not be provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 only on the amusement park side.

On the contrary, the player (and the clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by operating the operation button 9030, while the game hall. It is also possible not to provide a means that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided). In such a configuration, the player and the clerk of the game hall can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). .. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the playground to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation.

(10) The number of winning information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 90 and the like can be obtained from the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031. Is displayed on the image display device 905 only in the maintenance mode in which is the display position (second position), and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the non-display position (first position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 905. That is, it may be treated in the same manner as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG. 48 (a).

As described above, the clerk of the amusement park performs a predetermined operation for the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 90 and the like. The information can be displayed on the image display device 905 only when it is performed, and may be information that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state in which a player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed), a state in which a game end determination is not performed (a state in which a special figure game is being executed, a normal figure game). Is the information that is not displayed on the image display device 905 in the state where It may be possible to display only (before), or it may be possible to display only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when an operation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed. good.

(11) Further, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 90 or the like can be obtained in either maintenance mode or game mode. It may be possible to display on the image display device 905 even in the mode of. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. The information on the number of winnings may be displayed. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be different depending on the period during which the game is not performed and the period during which the game may be performed.

In addition, in the maintenance mode, the information on the number of winnings of all the items that have been aggregated is displayed, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the game hall side or the operation of the player) or Information on the number of winnings of (predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different depending on the period during which the game is not performed and the period during which the game may be performed.

(12) Further, in the game mode, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the game end determination, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β. On the other hand, during the period when the game end determination is not performed and it is determined that the game is in progress, the winning number information may be displayed only in the first area α. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

In addition, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the game end judgment being made, the winning number information of all the aggregated items is displayed, but the game end judgment is not made and the game is played. During the period determined to be medium, the winning number information of some items (items set by the game field side or the operation of the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

(13) In the above embodiment, the winning number information is displayed with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information) (setting to display the winning number information (image size). The setting for displaying the number of winnings information and the number of winnings are not changed (common) between FIG. 87 and FIG. 88) and the setting for not displaying the number of winnings information (FIG. 89). The visible range is different depending on the setting that does not display the information, but the setting is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 92, the setting that displays the winning number information (FIG. 92 (a)) With the setting of not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 92 (b)), the display position and display range (image size) of all images including the background image other than the winning number information may be shared. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information.

(14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (image size) of the decorative symbol are set to display the winning number information (FIGS. 87 and 88) and not to display the winning number information (FIG. 89). ), But the display position and display range of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 93, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 93 (a)), the setting for displaying the winning number information is not displayed rather than the interval between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (FIG. 93 (FIG. 93). The intervals between the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative pattern display area 905L when the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. In this way, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display or the stop display of the decorative symbol in the first area α may be allowed. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest by executing the production using the entire screen.

(15) In the above embodiment, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified as the error of the gaming machine, but the error of the gaming machine is not limited to these, and the error of the gaming machine is an abnormality of opening the front door and an abnormality of the payout mechanism. (Abnormality of winning balls, etc.), Illegal winning of the large winning opening (abnormality in which winning the large winning opening is detected even though the large winning opening is not open), or malfunction of various members of the pachinko gaming machine 901. And so on.

[Other variants]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. The control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms and the following modification examples are shown. The control and configuration of the pachinko / pachislot machines may be arbitrarily combined.

In the above embodiment, the game balls that do not pass through the gate 9041B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the members that define the flow direction of the game balls are the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is possible to win one of them. With such a configuration, even if the game ball does not pass through the gate 9041B in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize in the general winning opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 9041B. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, the game ball that has not passed through the gate 9041B may win a prize in either the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D at a higher rate than the game ball that has passed through the gate 9041B. .. With such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the gate 9041B infrequently in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize in the general winning opening provided on the downstream side. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Furthermore, by executing a specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, executing the specific effect at different ratios according to the game state includes that the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game state and the specific effect is not executed in another game state. .. Further, in the above embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect at different ratios according to the game period, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect may not be executed in another game period. included.

In the above embodiment, in order to execute the effect at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state, the effect can be executed only in the first state. In the second state, the effect is not executed. Here, the classification of the first state and the second state is, in addition to the classification according to the game state described above, the classification according to the number of reserved memories, and the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (special figure game). Classification according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect), or , Classification according to the specific effect timing (for example, before the establishment of the reach state in the variation pattern with reach effect) There are classifications such as whether it is before or after the establishment of the pseudo-continuous production, or whether it is before or after the execution of the pseudo-continuous production in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous production).

In the first effect mode to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executed only in one of (1) a normal state and (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state. Further, in the 13th to 24th production forms, either (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, or (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. The specific effect may be executed only in one case. For example, (1) the specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, and (2) the specific effect is specified in the case of the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. You may not execute the production.

In the first effect mode to the twelfth effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed depending on whether the game state is (1) a normal state, or (2) a probability variation state or a time saving state. Although the types of specific effects are different, when the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the specific effect is executed and the specific effect to be executed are based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, or whether or not the specific effect is executed and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the effect execution conditions common to those in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. .. Further, the classification of the gaming state is not limited to (1) a normal state, (2) a probabilistic state or a time saving state, and for example, (1) a high base state or (2). It may be classified as whether it is in a high base state, or it may be classified as (1) a jackpot gaming state or (2) a jackpot gaming state.

In the thirteenth effect mode to the twenty-fourth effect form, the game period is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, or (2) outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. Whether or not the specific effect is executed and the type of the specific effect to be executed are determined according to the period, but the game period is not limited to such a division, and for example, (1) the number of reserved memories May be a period of 1 or less, or (2) a period in which the number of reserved memories is 2 or more, and (1) a period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. (2) It may be a division as to whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed.

Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed? It may be a division. Further, it may be classified into (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good.

In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect, but both the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed. May be executable. That is, when the winning condition is satisfied, one of the variation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect that meets the predetermined condition is executed (for example, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less, the change result advance notice effect is executed. However, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or more, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed at the same time. For example, when the look-ahead notice effect is an effect that changes the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold memory, it is referred to as the above-mentioned fluctuation result advance notice effect (only the voice effect, or the voice effect and the accessory effect). The look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the same time, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the look-ahead notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, if the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, the variable display advance notice effect is prioritized and executed, and the variable display display result executed when the winning condition is satisfied is executed. If there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit in the start winning determination, although it is an out-of-order symbol, it is preferable to give priority to the pre-reading advance notice effect.

In the above embodiment, it is set whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 9030 only during the period determined by the effect control CPU 90120 to be in the non-gaming state (only when the demo screen is displayed). Although the possible examples have been described, the execution status of the special figure game (special symbol) is not limited to such a form, regardless of the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state). Whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the special figure game), the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game) ), It may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings by using the operation button 9030. That is, whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 9030 even during the period during which the game is being played, for example, during the period during which the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed or during the period during which the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. It may be configurable.
In such a configuration, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is set to be displayed, it does not depend on the gaming state (for example, the normal state, the probability change state, the time saving state, the big hit game state), and the special figure. The execution status of the game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game), the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, etc.) The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of pending memories of the normal game.

In the above embodiment, there is no limit on the period during which the display changeover switch 9032 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 903a can be opened on the playground side, the display changeover switch 9032 is operated. , It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not limited to such a form, the period during which the setting operation can be performed on the playground side may be limited. For example, in a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided, even when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the playground side, the setting screens shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are displayed. The operation button 9030 shall be used for selection and determination. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of the special figure game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed). , The number of reserved memories of the special figure game) and the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game) The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period controlled to the jackpot game state, the period controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the period during which the special figure game is executed, the period during which the reserved memory number of the special figure game is not 0, etc. are shown in the figure. The setting operation shown on the amusement park side may be prohibited without displaying the setting screens shown in 50 (1) to (3).

In the above embodiment, only when the player is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by switching the display changeover switch 9032 which cannot be operated (the operation unit is set to the second position). , The setting screen (FIGS. 50 (1) to (3)) for allowing the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Regardless of the form, it is possible for both the player side and the game hall side to set whether or not to display the number of prizes to the general winning opening as a configuration that does not provide a display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only by the game hall side. This is a common setting screen (similar to FIGS. 50 (1) to (3), and is used to select and determine whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by operating the operation button 9030. The screen) may be displayed. In the configuration for displaying such a common setting screen, even if the clerk of the amusement park is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. When the setting is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

In addition, when the display changeover switch 9032, which can be operated only on the playground side, is set to display the number of prizes in the general winning opening (the operation unit is set to the second position), and when the operation button 9030 is operated, it is general. Common information (for example, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table) is displayed on the image display device 905 when the number of winnings to the winning openings is set to be displayed. You may let it. In such a configuration, even if the setting is such that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 9032, if the setting is made so that the common information is displayed by operating the operation button 9030 thereafter, By applying the later accepted settings, common information may be displayed on the image display device 905.

In the above embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, in the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from the establishment of the reach state to the derivation display of the confirmed decorative symbol. .. Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a time saving state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side determines whether the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed or not displayed in which period (game state). It may be possible to set it, or it may be possible to set it by a setting means (for example, operation button 9030) on the player side.

In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player inputs a player ID (for example, an ID of a recording medium owned by the player or an ID for personal identification registered on the website) by the operation button 9030. By doing so, it is possible to aggregate game data including the number of winnings in the general winning opening after the player ID is input, and to operate the operation button 9030 when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is finished. Then, the game data aggregated from the input of the player ID and thereafter may be output to the image display device 905 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures a two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, so that the information terminal and an information management server connected to the Internet are connected. Communication is performed with the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code, and the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the information management server. The game data managed by is updated. The player can access the information management server from the information terminal and check the stored game data (game data associated with the player ID). As a result, the player wins a prize in the general winning opening. It becomes possible to grasp the number. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 905 may be set by the setting means on the playground side (for example, the display changeover switch 9032), and the setting means on the player side. It may be set by (for example, the operation button 9030).

In such a form, the player may be given a privilege according to the number of winnings to the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening exceeds a predetermined number, the player with the player ID is given a background image, application software, etc. that can be used on the information terminal as a privilege. May be good. Further, points corresponding to the number of winning points to the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be able to exchange a part or all of the owned points for a privilege.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening is described, but the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed, and the game ball wins in the general winning opening. It may be a notification of what has been done. For example, the winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the sound effects and sounds of the winning notification may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. It may be. In such a configuration, as in the above embodiment, whether or not to notify the general winning opening that the game ball has won is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or it may be possible to set it by a setting means (for example, operation button 9030) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning status to the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 905 has the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the winning frequency (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls fired into the game area, or the general winning per hour. The number of winnings in the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the frequency of winning. Further, when a prize is given to the general winning opening, the winning to the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 908L and 908R. By using such a voice notification, it becomes easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning the general winning opening. Further, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the hitting ball operation handle, the operation button 9030, or the like may be vibrated. By providing such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easier for the game or the like to grasp the winning frequency to the general winning opening.

The number of winnings and the frequency of winning each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and are also output to a management device such as a hall computer communicatively connected to the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is possible to manage the number of prizes to each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be useful, for example, for the maintenance of gaming machines.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and a sound effect different from when winning in another winning opening such as a starting winning opening. It is good to output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be different for each of the general winning openings. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a specific general winning opening is won.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the execution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode may be changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the effect mode of the advance notice effect change, and the advance notice effect is changed for a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable display. Until the number of impressions is executed, it is preferable that the execution ratio and the effect mode after the change are continued.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first variable display of the decorative symbol executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening, and a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable display number is executed. Until then, it is advisable to continue the music after the change. Further, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined value, a specific music (for example, a music during a big hit) may be output. In addition, the player plays the music (BGM) from a plurality of songs (BGM) based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning slot or the number of winning balls in the general winning slot has reached a predetermined number. Music (BGM) may be selectable.

Further, the music being played may be continuously output based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the music during the jackpot may be continuously output even after the jackpot game state ends, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. Further, the stage change that changes the background image of the decorative pattern and the music (BGM) may be executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It should be noted that the stage (background image and music) of the transition destination may be different depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the specific effect executed based on the winning of the general winning opening is the variation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, a general winning opening in which a game ball has not won may be displayed among a plurality of general winning openings, and a character may appear when the game ball wins in the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko game machine 901, when the game ball is not won in the general winning opening for a predetermined period even though the game ball is launched in the gaming area, or the winning frequency in the general winning opening is less than the threshold value. In some cases, the image display device 905 may be made to perform a specific notification such as displaying that the general winning opening has not been won. In addition, even though the game ball is fired in the game area, if the game ball does not win only in a specific general winning opening among a plurality of general winning openings for a predetermined period, or a prize is given to a specific general winning opening. If the frequency is less than the threshold value, the image display device 905 may be made to execute a specific notification such as displaying that a prize has not been generated in the specific general winning opening.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the simultaneous production is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), according to the number of prizes to the general winning opening until the simultaneous production is executed, or all at once. A specific production may be executed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the production period. Further, the decorative symbol may be changed, the stop symbol may be changed, or the sliding effect may be executed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, the object displayed on the image display device 905 is increased by one, and the winning in the general winning opening and the number of winnings are recognized. It may be easier. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, only the number of prize balls paid out based on the prizes in the general prize opening is cumulatively added, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the prizes in the general prize opening. When the number reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying "100 shots exceeded!" On the image display device 905 may be executed. If the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is the period during which the gaming machine error is notified based on fraud detection or failure detection. It is assumed that the notification of the game machine error is displayed with priority over the specific effect, and the specific effect that has been suspended after the notification of the game machine error is completed is executed.

(9) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning sound is output every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and during notification of the gaming machine error, the notification sound of the gaming machine error is output rather than the winning sound. You may give priority to output. In addition, every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, a winning display is displayed on the image display device 905, and during notification of the gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display and output. You may let it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening when controlled to the big hit game state. The number of prize balls paid out based on the above may be added and displayed on the image display device 905 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state]. In such a configuration, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is added to the displayed [Number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state]. At times, it is advisable to add the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball to the big winning opening, and the [in the big hit game state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball to the general winning opening. The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of prize balls may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B in the left game area 9010A, 10 prize balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening in the right game area 9010B is paid out. When a game ball wins in the 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, an effect of inciting a game ball to be won in the general winning opening may be executed. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings, such as the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, the plurality of effect forms are present. The image display device 905 notifies the general winning opening in which the game ball has not won among the general winning openings, and executes an effect suggesting to the player to aim at the general winning opening in which the game ball has not won. It is good to set it to. In addition, in a form such as the 8th effect mode and the 16th effect form, in which a specific effect is executed based on a game ball winning in a specific order in a plurality of winning openings, the winning openings and the winning openings to be won It is preferable that the image display device 905 notifies the order in which the prizes should be awarded so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, "Aim for the first general winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning of the first general winning opening 9050A is confirmed, the next "Aim for the 1st start winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning of the 1st starting winning opening is confirmed, finally, "Aim for the 2nd general winning opening!" Is displayed and the second After the winning of the general winning opening 9050B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) Further, when the game area 9010 is provided with a guidance path for the game ball toward the general winning opening, and the entry sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guidance path. , Based on the detection of the game ball by the approach sensor, an effect of notifying in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening may be executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In addition, a period from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening to the execution of the payout of the winning ball is secured for a certain period, and the production based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed within that period. You may do so.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 905, a general winning opening or an entrance to a guidance path connected to the general winning opening is provided on the stage. The configuration may be set so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening and the entrance to the guidance route.

(15) It is also possible to execute an effect in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 is updated every time the general winning opening is won. For example, the character grows each time the general winning opening is won, and when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (when the character grows to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege, etc.) is executed. You may do so. In addition, each time a prize is entered in the general winning opening, an effect that increases the gauge is executed, and when the predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege) is performed. Etc.) may be executed. In such a form of production, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. It may be done.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect to be executed (variation result notice effect, look-ahead notice effect) differs depending on the game state when the winning condition is satisfied, and is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although an example in which the sounds are different has been described, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be different depending on the game state, not limited to such a form. In addition, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, there are many cases where the production by the game effect lamp 909 and the music to be played are more flashy than in the normal state. The mode may be easy to understand for the player and flashy.

(17) If the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the frequency of winning are less than the standard values even though a certain number of gaming balls are fired in the gaming area 9010, the player is usually notified. Information on a gaming machine that is difficult to play, such as a latent probability change state or a limiter, may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described, but tentatively, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory). If the winning condition is satisfied while the number and the total number of the second reserved storages are also 0, neither the fluctuation result advance notice effect nor the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, appearance of a specific character or reproduction of a specific song) as a specific effect.

(19) Further, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved storage (the total number of the first reserved storage and the second reserved storage) is 0. , The execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed or at the timing when the number of reserved storages becomes 2 or more. That is, the specific effect that was suspended based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game was satisfied or the start condition of the special figure game was satisfied without immediately executing the specific effect based on the establishment of the winning condition. You may want to do it.

(20) In the above embodiment, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the game ball does not win in the general winning opening (for example, "the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small". The message "It's too much.") May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, it is general only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the prize number information stored in the prize number management table) based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031 is displayed on the image display device 905. It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball does not win in the winning opening. The clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball into the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. In addition, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 905 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening. It may be. Further, similarly to the display control of the number of winnings in the general winning opening, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number based on the setting by the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, it is general. The image display device 905 may display that the game ball does not win the winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, it means that the game ball is excessively winning in the general winning opening (for example, "to the general winning opening". The message "The number of winnings is too large.") May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, it is general only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the prize number information stored in the prize number management table) based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031 is displayed on the image display device 905. It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball has won an excessive prize at the winning opening. The clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball into the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 transmits the winning number information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 9012 to the game information management device that manages the game information, and the game information is transmitted. The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning signal when the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is detected (for example, one pulse signal is output for each winning. By doing so, the game information management device may manage the number of winnings to the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device uses the game information as the number of winnings in the general winning opening per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) and the number of winnings in the general winning opening per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Or, the winning rate to the general winning opening (the number of winnings to the general winning opening ÷ the number of balls to be driven) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 has described an example in which the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 905 is increased for each prize in the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed each time the winning opening is won. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, in the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings to each winning opening, the number of payouts, etc.). Although the example of notification in the above has been described, the notification is not limited to such a form, and the notification is made by voice notification using the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, and the lighting / extinguishing control of the 7-segment display. You may. In addition, it is not limited to the form of notifying all the information of the winning number management table, and only the information of the winning openings whose payout number, winning ratio, etc. are not within the predetermined standard range (or within the standard range) is notified. You may do so.

(25) In the above embodiment, in the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings to each winning opening, the number of payouts, etc.) as shown in FIG. 62. Although an example of notifying (displaying) in a mode unrelated to the effect executed in the game has been described, the notification is not limited to such a form, and the notification may be made in a mode corresponding to the mode of the effect executed in the game. good. By notifying in a mode according to the mode of the effect, it is only necessary to confirm the notification mode as to which type of model the information is, as compared with the case where the information is notified only by the table data as shown in FIG. It will be easy to grasp with. The effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demo screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, a big hit effect, etc., and is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 905. Or a lamp may be used. In addition, notifying in a mode according to the mode of the production means, for example, displaying or outputting a voice so that the character appearing during the advance notice production or the reach production reads out the information of the winning number management table, or whether or not there is a change. Regardless of this, the resident character displayed on the image display device 905 and giving a notice or explaining the game may be displayed and output so that the information in the winning number management table is read aloud. Further, the information is not limited to the character image, and the information of the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game.

(26) In the above embodiment, the operating means such as the mode changeover switch 9031 operated to display the information of the winning number management table as the information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning opening). However, an example has been described in which the player is inoperable and is provided in a position where only the clerk of the game hall can operate, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the player and the clerk of the game hall cannot operate. Therefore, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated only by a person concerned such as an inspector, an inspector, or a manufacturer of the gaming machine. Further, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the above-mentioned player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to winning a game, but a counter having a maximum of 3 bytes and a counter having a maximum of 4 bytes have been used. Can also be provided. At this time, a calculation for displaying the above-mentioned two types of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) on the above-mentioned display monitor 9029 from the total number of acquired balls of the game medium (prize ball) paid out from the gaming machine. The method is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 104, when the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for a bonus, and the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled by a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes, the calculation is performed using the upper 16 bits. You may go. By the way, assuming that the number of acquired balls is 30,000 per day by the 4-byte counter, 4294863225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days. = Approximately 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96A, an example in which the display monitor 9029 is provided in the central portion on the main board 9011 housed in the board case 90201 has been described, but the display monitor 9029 has been described. May be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), a main board 9011C without a display monitor and a display board 11D are provided separately from the main board 9011C, and the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are connected by a harness 9011E. The display monitor 9029 may be provided on the display board 9011D. In this case, the main board 9011C performs the calculation of the winning combination and the winning combination displayed on the display monitor 9029 and the reception of data to be used for these calculations. The main board 9011C transmits the calculated combination and combination ratio, as well as information on control for displaying these, to the display board 9011D via the harness 9011E. In the display board 9011D, the winning combination and the winning combination may be displayed on the display monitor 9029 based on the data transmitted from the main board 9011C.

Further, the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are housed in a board case 90201A which is a caulking board case. A caulking pin 9011B is attached to the substrate case 90201A as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 96 (A). By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are completely enclosed in the board case 90201A, and fraudulent acts against the main board 9011C are prevented. Further, also in the substrate case 90201A, as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 96A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 9029.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the display board 9011D may be provided outside the board case 90201B which is a caulking board case, and the main board 9011C may be enclosed in the board case 90201B. In this example, the display board 9011D is connected to the main board 9011C by a harness 9011E.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the display board 9011D may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201C, and the main substrate 9011C may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display board 9011D is connected to the main board 9011C by a harness 9011E. Further, also in the substrate case 90201C, as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 96A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 9029. The substrate case 90201C that encloses the display substrate 9011D does not have to be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 95 (A), and a crimping use record is written on the label 9011R. May be good. Here, the label 9011R may be arranged at a position where a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden. By hiding a part of the display monitor 9029 by the label 9011R in this way, for example, when the glass door frame 903a is opened, the player can easily prevent the player from visually recognizing the winning combination and the winning combination. Further, even when the label 9011R is attached, the display monitor 9029 may be attached at a position where it is not hidden.

Further, in the above embodiment, electric accessories such as a large winning opening (attacker) opened and closed by a solenoid and a second starting winning opening (electric chew) are used as movable accessories. Alternatively, a so-called mechanical solenoid that opens and closes according to the weight of the game ball may be used as a movable solenoid. Further, although the display monitor 9029 uses a 7-segment LED, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment LED. Further, instead of the LED, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 903a may be opened to take measures such as canceling an error regardless of the content to be displayed on the display monitor 9029, for example, the display of the combination or the combination ratio. For example, in order to pay out the game balls, a replenishment mechanism for replenishing the game balls (replenishment balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 903. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball clogging occurs, the glass door frame 903a may be opened to clear the ball clogging and release the error. When the glass door frame 903a is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, the combination and the combination ratio are not displayed on the display monitor 9029. good.

Further, at this time, in order not to display the winning combination, the winning combination, etc. on the display monitor 9029, it may be a condition that no error has occurred in the display of the winning combination, the winning combination, and the like. The errors in the display of the winning combination and the winning combination here are, for example, the detection of the abnormal operation determined in step S90101 shown in FIG. 102, the acquisition of the winning information during the business hours determined in step 104, and the step S90106. It may be the detection of a predetermined number or more of prizes for the attacker per unit time determined by. By providing the condition that such an error in the display of the combination and the combination ratio does not occur, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player sees the information such as the combination and the combination ratio.

Further, the glass door frame 903a is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, and after the error clearing is completed, a predetermined period until the winning combination, the winning ratio, etc. for the display monitor 9029 are displayed. For example, it may be waited for 1 minute and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. After the error occurrence is cleared, the cause of the error occurrence cannot be completely eliminated, and the same error often occurs continuously. By displaying the winning combination, the winning combination, etc. on the display monitor 9029 after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the information such as the winning combination, the winning combination, etc. even when such an error occurs. .. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of failure of the image display device 905, the predetermined period of the ball clogging of the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 9029, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying an error. It is preferable that the error indicator is arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029. Specifically, the display monitor 9029 may be arranged at the position of the right 1/3 of the main board 9011, and the error indicator may be arranged at the position of the left 1/3 of the main board 9011. Further, in order to make the display monitor 9029 easy to understand, the location of the display monitor 9029 on the main board 9011 may be printed in characters on the board case 90201, or a sticker may be attached to the board case 90201. You may leave it.

(29) In the above embodiment, it has been described that the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (%) are calculated and displayed on the display monitor by taking the pachinko gaming machine as an example. A value corresponding to the ratio (%) or the winning combination (%) may be calculated and displayed.

The method of calculating the winning combination (%) in the slot machine will be described below. In the slot machine, the symbol can be changed by setting the number of bets, and a prize is generated according to the result of the symbol fluctuation. The winnings in the slot machine are shifted to a granting prize that accompanies the granting of game value, a re-gaming winning that allows the symbol to start changing without setting the number of bets, and a special gaming state that improves the probability of occurrence of the granting prize. There is a bonus prize. Here, the winning combination (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of the gaming value (the above-mentioned pachinko game) obtained by awarding a prize as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period in which the fluctuation of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. Cumulative total of game value (corresponding to the total number of balls acquired in the machine) obtained by awarding a prize as a result of a change in the symbol during the period of transition to the special gaming state (in the above-mentioned pachinko machine) It is expressed as a ratio of (corresponding to the number of consecutive winning balls). For example, in a period in which the symbol is changed 6000 times, when the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, a prize is awarded during the period of transition to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the winning combination (%).

An example of displaying the calculated winning ratio (%) and winning combination (%) on a display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the center of the main board is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control board, etc. A display monitor may be provided on another board, a game board surface, a game machine frame (underframe), or the like.
Further, the present invention is not limited to the one provided with a dedicated display monitor for displaying the winning ratio (%) and the winning combination (%), and is not limited to an existing display device (for example, an image display device 905, a 7-segment display for displaying an error). A combination (%) or a combination (%) may be displayed by using a device, a credit display in a slot machine, a payout number display, or the like).

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, etc., one variation is made when the variation is started. An example of transmitting a pattern specification command has been shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) has the presence or absence of pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of sliding effect, etc. in the first command before reaching (if not reaching, so-called A command (for example, a pre-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, a pre-variation pattern) of the second stop is transmitted, and the second command determines the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (for example, the post-variation pattern) after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. ..

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board may select the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Only one type of off symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. .. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, etc., the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines are not limited to payout-type gaming machines that pay out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are scored based on the occurrence of winnings. It can also be applied to the enclosed gaming machine to be given.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901. , It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 9c, 9d 4th symbol display area 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 18c Total hold memory display 20 Special Variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 904A, 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 Board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A, 9022B Start port switch 9023 Count switch 9029 Display monitor 9030 Operation button 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 Production control CPU
90123 Display control unit 901000 Movable accessory

Claims (1)

The main board that controls the game,
A predetermined area where prize balls are paid out by passing through the game medium, and
An information display means capable of displaying predetermined prize ball information regarding a prize ball paid out by passing the game medium through the predetermined area, and
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
Promotional notification means that can execute promotion notification to promote the movement of the player,
An effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means is provided.
The promotion notification means has a first pattern for displaying at least the first promotion image, and a second promotion image different from the first promotion image in addition to the first promotion image. Is feasible by the second pattern of displaying
The degree of expectation differs depending on whether the promotion notification is executed by the first pattern or the second pattern.
The information display means is provided on the main board so as not to interfere with the visibility of the predetermined prize ball information.

Images